D4B802D18D7-Body Work PDF

Service
Workshop Manual
Octavia III 2013 ➤
Octavia III 2014 ➤
Body Work
Edition 04.2016
Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
Service Department. Technical Information

Service
List of Workshop Manual Repair Groups
Repair Group
00 - Technical data
50 - Body - front
55 - Bonnet, rear lid
57 - Front doors, door components, central locking
58 - Rear doors, door components
60 - Sunroof
63 - Bumpers
64 - Glazing
66 - Exterior equipment
68 - Interior equipment
69 - Passenger protection
70 - Trim, insulation
72 - Seat frames
74 - Seat - padding, covers
Technical information should always be available to the foremen and mechanics, because their
careful and constant adherence to the instructions is essential to ensure vehicle road-worthiness and
safety. In addition, the normal basic safety precautions for working on motor vehicles must, as a
matter of course, be observed.
All rights reserved.

No reproduction without prior agreement from publisher.
Copyright © 2016 ŠKODA AUTO a. s. D4B802D18D7

Octavia III 2013 ➤ , Octavia III 2014 ➤
Body Work - Edition 04.2016
Contents
00 - Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1 General points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
50 - Body - front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1 Front body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 Lock carrier with components parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.4 Removing and installing lock carrier with component parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.5 Front wing - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.6 Removing and installing front wing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.7 Removing and installing the wing support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.8 Plenum chamber cover- Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.9 Bulkhead plenum chamber - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.10 Damping of the plenum chamber - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.11 Noise insulation - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.12 Summary of components - Noise insulation - diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.13 Underfloor trim panel - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.14 Tunnel bridge front - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.15 Tunnel bridge rear - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
55 - Bonnet, rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1 Front flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.1 Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.2 Removing and installing the front flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.3 Removing and installing the actuator for the front flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4 Removing and installing the hinge for the pedestrian protection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5 Removing and installing the hinge for the front flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.6 Removing and installing the support bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.7 Lock and unlock components of front flap - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.8 Removing and installing front flap lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.9 Separating the Bowden cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.10 Removing and installing the locking clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.11 Removing and installing operating lever - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1.12 Removing and installing the operating lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.13 Adjusting the front flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.14 Adjusting the flap lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.15 Adjusting the locking clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.2 Removing and installing tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2.3 Removing and installing the closing wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.4 Adjusting tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.5 Adjusting the closing wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.6 Adjusting the rubber buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.7 Removing and installing the tailgate lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.8 Removing and installing pressurized gas strut of tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.9 Removing and installing the spindle drive of the tailgate (Octavia III - Combi) . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.10 Seal for tailgate - Mounting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.11 Removing and installing tailgate seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3 Fuel tank lid unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.1 Fuel-tank lid unit - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Contents i
3.2 Removing and installing fuel tank lid unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
57 - Front doors, door components, central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

1 Front door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1.1 Door hinges - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1.2 Removing and installing the door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
1.3 Door adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2 Door internal parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.1 Front door - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.2 Removing and installing the door cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.3 Removing and installing the door retaining strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2.5 Door handle and door lock - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.6 Removing and installing cap for lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.7 Removing and installing lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2.8 Removing and installing cap (without lock cylinder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.9 Removing and installing the door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.10 Removing and installing the door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.11 Removing and installing bearing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.12 Front door window - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.13 Removing and installing door window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.14 Removing and installing window lifter motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
2.15 Removing and installing control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2.16 Remove and install window lifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2.17 Removing and installing the window run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.18 Removing and installing the inner window channel strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2.19 Removing and installing
Protected the outer Copying
by copyright. window channel
for private strip purposes,
or commercial . . . . .in. part
. . or. .in .whole,
. . . is. not
. . permitted
......... 90
2.20 Removing and installing the toinside
with respect door seal
the correctness . . . in. this
of information . . .document.
. . . . . Copyright
. . . . . .by. ŠKODA
. . . . .AUTO
. . . A.. .S.�. . . . . . . 91
2.21 Removing and installing the outside door seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3 Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.1 Removing and installing the battery for the ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
3.2 Removing and installing the cap on the ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
58 - Rear doors, door components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

1 Rear door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
1.1 Rear door - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
1.2 Removing and installing the door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
1.3 Door adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2 Door internal parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
2.2 Removing and installing the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
2.3 Removing and installing the door retaining strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
2.5 Door handle and door lock - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
2.6 Removing and installing the cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2.7 Removing and installing the door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2.8 Removing and installing the door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
2.9 Removing and installing bearing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
2.10 Rear door window - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
2.11 Removing and installing door window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
2.12 Removing and installing window lifter motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
2.13 Removing and installing the manual drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
2.14 Removing and installing window crank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
ii Contents
2.15 Remove and install window lifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

2.16 Removing and installing the window run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
2.17 Removing window run - Combi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
2.18 Removing and installing the outer trim panel on the C pillar (Combi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
2.19 Removing and installing the rear fixed door window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
2.20 Removing and installing the fixed door window (Octavia III - Combi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
2.21 Removing and installing the inner window channel strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
2.22 Removing and installing the outer window channel strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
2.23 Removing and installing the outer window channel strip (Octavia III - Combi) . . . . . . . . . . 138
2.24 Removing and installing the inside door seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
2.25 Removing and installing the outside door seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
60 - Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
1 Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
1.1 Summary of components - Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
1.2 Removing and installing spoiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
1.3 Removing and installing glass panel for sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
1.4 Adjusting the glass panel for sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
1.5 Replace gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
1.6 Summary of components - screen for sliding roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
1.7 Removing and installing the sliding roof screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
1.8 Removing and installing motor for sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
1.9 Teach sliding sunroof control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
1.10 Removing and installing cover for sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
1.11 Installing and removing the sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
1.12 Installing and removing the frame for the sliding block guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
1.13 Removing and installing water drain hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
1.14 Cleaning the water drain hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2 Sun roof - Combi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
2.1 Summary of components - Combi Sun roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
2.2 Summary of components - screen for sliding roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
2.3 Assembly overview - Air deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
2.4 Removing and installing the glass roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
2.5 Removing and installing the rear glass panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
2.6 Adjust the glass cover - check height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
2.7 Adjust glass panel at front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
2.8 Adjust the rear glass cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
2.9 Removing and installing sun roof frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
2.10 Removing and installing the draft deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
2.11 Removing and installing control unit for sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
2.12 Removing and installing roof blind control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
2.13 Close the sliding roof manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
2.14 Removing and installing outer seal for the sliding roof frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
2.15 Removing and installing glass panel seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
2.16 Removing and installing the sliding roof screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
2.17 Teach sliding sunroof control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
2.18 Teach control unit for screen for sliding roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
3ProtectedWater drain
by copyright. hoses
Copying . .or. commercial
for private . . . . . . purposes,
. . . . . .in.part
. . or. .in.whole,
. . . .is .not. .permitted
............................ 210
3.1with respect
Summary of components
to the correctness of information in- this
water drain
document. hoses
Copyright by ŠKODA . . . AUTO
. . . .A.. S.�
.......................... 210
3.2 Cleaning the water drain hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
3.3 Removing and installing water drain hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
63 - Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
1 Front bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
1.1 Summary of components - Front bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
1.2 Removing and installing the front bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Contents iii
1.3 Summary of components - Front bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

1.4 Summary of components - Front bumper RS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
1.5 Summary of components - Front bumper SCOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
1.6 Summary of components - Front bumper bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
1.7 Cutting out the openings for the parking aid sensors (drill) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
1.8 Cutting openings for park steering assistant sender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
2 Rear bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
2.1 Summary of components - rear bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
2.2 Summary of components - rear bumper RS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
2.3 Summary of components - rear bumper SCOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
2.4 Removing and installing the rear bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
2.5 Rear bumper bracket and runners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
3 Rear bumper - Combi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
3.1 Summary of components - rear bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
3.2 Removing and installing the rear bumper, Combi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
3.3 Rear bumper bracket and runners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
64 - Glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
1 Glued windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
1.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
1.2 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
1.3 Windscreen - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
1.4 Removing windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
1.5 Installing windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
1.6 Rear window - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
1.7 Removing and installing the rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
1.8 Installing rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
1.9 Summary of components - rear window (Octavia III - Combi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
1.10 Removing and installing the rear window (Octavia III - Combi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
1.11 Summary of components - side window (Octavia III - Combi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
1.12 Removing and installing the side window (Octavia III - Combi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
1.13 Prepare pane
Protected by forCopying
copyright. fittingfor- private
cut back glue bead
or commercial purposes, .in.part
. . or. .in.whole,
. . . .is .not. .permitted
...................... 247
1.14 Prepare pane for fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.� . . . . ..................... 247
1.15 Prepare body flange for fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
1.16 Installation instructions for all the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
1.17 Glueing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
1.18 Minimum hardening time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
1.19 Cleaning necessary due to soiling through glue sealing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
66 - Exterior equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

1 Wheelhouse liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
1.1 Removing and installing the front wheelhouse liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
1.2 Removing and installing the rear wheelhouse liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
2 Exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
2.1 Exterior mirror- Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
2.2 Removing and installing exterior mirror glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
2.3 Removing and installing adjustment unit with motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
2.4 Removing and installing the mirror housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
2.5 Removing and installing the trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
2.6 Removing and installing mounting part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
2.7 Removing and installing exterior mirror (electric operating lever) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
3 Trailer coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
3.1 Summary of components - Trailer coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
3.2 Summary of components - Trailer coupling (Octavia III - Combi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
3.3 Control unit for trailer detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
iv Contents
4 Roof rack (Octavia III - Combi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

4.1 Summary of components - roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
5 Letterings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.1 Installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.2 Removing and installing the emblem on the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.3 Dimensions - Letterings and emblems on the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
6 Rear spoiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
6.1 Summary of components - rear spoiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
6.2 Removing and installing spoiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
7 Rear spoiler (Octavia RS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
7.1 Summary of components - Rear spoiler (Octavia RS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
7.2 Removing and installing the spoiler - RS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
8 Rear spoiler - Octavia Combi RS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
8.1 Rear spoiler RS - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
8.2 Removing and installing spoiler - Combi RS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
9 Rear spoiler - Octavia Combi - Greenline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
9.1 Greenline rear spoiler - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
9.2 Removing and installing spoiler - Greenline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
10 Trim strips - Scout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
10.1 Glueing tuning parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
11 Letterings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
11.1 Lettering on radiator grille - SCOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
11.2 Lettering on radiator grille - RS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
12 Anti-chip protective film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
68 - Interior equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

1 Interior rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
1.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
1.2 Removing and installing the interior rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
1.3 Removing and installing the interior mirror with rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
1.4 Interior mirror with rain sensor and camera - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
1.5 Removing and installing the interior mirror with rain sensor and camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
1.6 Glueing the retaining plate for the interior rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
2 Covers, storage areas and trim panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
2.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
2.2 Summary of components - Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
2.3 Removing and installing centre console without armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
2.4 Removing and installing centre console with armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
2.5 Removing and installing the bracket of the centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
2.6 Removing and installing the armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
2.7 Summary of components - sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
309
2.8authorised
unless Removing and A.
by ŠKODA AUTO installing
S. ŠKODA AUTOthe sun visor
A. S. does . . . . . or. accept
not guarantee . . . .any
. . liability
............................ 310
3 Recessed handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
3.1 Removing and installing the recessed handles of the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
4 Bearing bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
4.1 Bearing bolt, left-hand drive - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
4.2 Bearing bolt, right-hand drive - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
4.3 Removing and installing bearing bolt, left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
4.4 Removing and installing bearing bolt, right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
69 - Passenger protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

1 Inspect seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
1.1 Test sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
1.2 Special instructions for the belt tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Contents v
1.3 Storage, transport and disposal of airbag, belt tensioner and battery separation and actuator
units (pyrotechnical components) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
2 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
2.1 Summary of components - three-point seatbelt front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
2.2 Summary of components - rear outer three-point seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
2.3 Summary of components - rear middle three-point seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
2.4 Summary of components - belt buckle front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
2.5 Summary of components - belt buckle rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
2.6 Removing and installing the front three-point seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
2.7 Removing and installing the rear outer three-point seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
2.8 Removing and installing the rear middle three-point seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
2.9 Removing and installing front belt guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
2.10 Removing and installing front belt end fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
2.11 Removing and installing the outer rear belt end fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
2.12 Removing and installing the seat belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
2.13 Removing and installing the front seat belt buckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
2.14 Removing and installing the rear seat belt buckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
3 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
3.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
3.2 Observe the general safety instructions for working on airbag, belt tensioner and battery
separation and actuator units (pyrotechnical components) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
3.3 Special instructions for driver and front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
3.4 Additional safety instructions for side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
3.5 Additional safety instructions for head airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
3.6 Safety instructions for crash sensors (pressure sensors) for front side airbag . . . . . . . . . . 344
3.7 Storage, transport and disposal of airbag, belt tensioner and battery separation and actuator
units (pyrotechnical components) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
3.8 Replacing airbag units following an accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
3.9 Overview
unless authorisedofbyfitting
ŠKODAlocations - airbag
AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. . S.
. .does
. . .not. .guarantee
. . . . .or. accept
. . . . any
. . liability
...................... 347
3.10 Summary of components of steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
3.11 Summary of components - Airbag on driver side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
3.12 Removing and installing airbag unit with ignition for airbag driver's side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
3.13 Replacing the connection line in the airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
3.14 Summary of components - Airbag on front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
3.15 Removing and installing airbag unit front passenger side with ignition 1 for airbag front
passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
3.16 Removing and installing key-operated switch for deactivating the front passenger side
airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
3.17 Summary of components - side airbags front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
3.18 Summary of components - side airbag rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
3.19 Removing and installing side airbag front with ignition for side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
3.20 Rear side airbag with ignition device for side airbag rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
3.21 Removing and installing the warning light for front passenger side airbag off . . . . . . . . . . 361
3.22 Summary of components - head airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
3.23 Removing and installing head airbag with ignition for head airbag driver's side . . . . . . . . 362
3.24 Summary of components - knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
3.25 Removing and installing knee airbag with ignition for knee airbag driver's side . . . . . . . . 366
3.26 After replacement, configure the control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
4 Crash sensors for airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
4.1 Overview of fitting location - crash sensors for airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
4.2 Removing and installing the crash sensor for front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
4.3 Removing and installing the crash sensor for side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
4.4 Removing and installing the crash sensor for side airbag rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
4.5 Removing and installing seat occupation sensor front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
5 Airbag control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
5.1 Airbag control unit - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
vi Contents
5.2 Removing and installing the airbag control unit J234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
6 Hinges for the pedestrian protection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
6.1 Set hinges for pedestrian protection system into the initial position after activation . . . . . . 380
70 - Trim, insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

1 Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
1.1 Summary of components - dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
1.2 Removing and installing passenger glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
1.3 Removing and installing passenger side glove compartment support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
1.4 Removing and installing glovebox on driver's side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
1.5 Removing and installing the steering column trim panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
1.6 Removing and installing the central tube of dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
2 Door and side trim panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
2.1 Removing and installing the front door trim panel on the driver's side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
2.2 Removing and installing the rear door trim panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
3 Trim panels of pillars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
3.1 Removing and installing top trim panel of pillar A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
3.2 Removing and installing bottom trim panel of pillar A on the driver's side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
3.3 Removing and installing bottom trim panel of pillar A on the front passenger side . . . . . . 407
3.4 Removing and installing top B-pillar trim panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
3.5 Removing and installing bottom B-pillar trim panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
3.6 Removing and installing trim panel of pillar C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
3.7 Removing and installing the top C pillar trim panel (Octavia III - Combi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
3.8 Removing and installing the wheel house trim on the C pillar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
4 Removing and installing the wheel house trim of the C pillar (Octavia III - Combi) . . . . . . 416
5 Removing and installing the D column trim (Octavia III - Combi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
6 Tailgate trim panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
6.1 Removing and installing the tailgate trim panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
6.2 Removing andby installing
Protected the for
copyright. Copying tailgate
private ortrim panel
commercial (Octavia
purposes, in part III
or in- whole,
Combi) ..................
is not permitted 421
6.3 Removing withand installing
respect the tailgate
to the correctness trim
of information in this.document.
. . . . . Copyright
. . . . . by. .ŠKODA
. . . . AUTO
. . . .A.. S.�
................ 422
6.4 Removing and installing the tailgate trim (Octavia III - Combi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
7 Luggage compartment trim panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
7.1 Removing and installing the tailgate/luggage compartment cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
7.2 Removing and installing the tailgate/luggage compartment cover (Octavia III - Combi) . . 426
7.3 Removing and installing top part of side luggage compartment trim panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
7.4 Removing and installing side luggage compartment trim panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
7.5 Removing and installing the side luggage compartment trim panel (Octavia III - Combi) . . 429
7.6 Removing and installing the seat backrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
7.7 Removing and installing the unlocking mechanism on the seat backrests (Octavia III -
Combi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
8 Increased luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
8.1 Increased luggage compartment floor - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
8.2 Removing and installing increased compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
9 Increased luggage compartment floor (CNG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
9.1 Increased luggage compartment floor - Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
9.2 Removing and installing increased compartment floor (CNG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
10 Moulded headliner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
10.1 Removing and installing moulded headliner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
10.2 Removing and installing the moulded headliner (Octavia III - Combi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
10.3 Removing and installing the moulded headliner in vehicles with sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . 442
10.4 Removing and installing the dampings and roof reinforcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
72 - Seat frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

1 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Contents vii
1.1 Removing and installing front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

1.2 Summary of components - seat pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
1.3 Removing and installing the seat upholstery on the side of the sill (seat without height
adjustment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
1.4 Installing and removing backrest adjustment - with handwheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
1.5 Removing and installing the seat trim panel on the sill side, electrically adjustable seat . . 453
1.6 Removing and installing the seat upholstery on the side of the sill (seat with height
adjustment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
1.7 Removing and installing the retainer for the seat upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
1.8 Removing and installing the operating lever of the seat height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
1.9 Removing and installing the seat upholstery on the tunnel side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
1.10 Removing and installing the grip for the seat height adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
1.11 Removing and installing the lever for adjusting the lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
1.12 Removing and installing front seat backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
1.13 Removing and installing front lumbar support frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
1.14 Removing the headrest guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
1.15 Remove headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
2 Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
2.1 Removing and installing the rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
3 Removing and installing backrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
4 Electrically adjustable front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
4.1 Summary of components - electrically adjustable front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
4.2 Installation location overview - electric/electronic components, electrically adjustable seat
........................................................................ 472
4.3 Removing and installing the seat rake adjustment, electrically adjustable seat . . . . . . . . . . 473
4.4 Seat rake adjustment, electrically adjustable seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
4.5 Removing and installing the bottom frame for seat pan with longitudinal seat adjustment
motor V28 / V31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
4.6 Removing and installing the lumbar support motor V125 / V126 / V129 / V130 . . . . . . . . 476
4.7 Removing and installing the seat height adjustment, electrically adjustable seat . . . . . . . . 477
4.8 Removing and installing seat adjustment operating unit E470 / E471 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
4.9 Removing and installing the lumbar support adjustment switch E176 / E177 . . . . . . . . . . 480
4.10 Removing and installing the lumbar support motor V125 / V126 / V129 / V130 . . . . . . . . 480
74 - Seat - padding, covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

1 Covers and upholstery of the front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
1.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
1.2 Removing and installing the cover and the upholstery of the front seat cushions . . . . . . . . 482
1.3 Removing and installing the cover and the upholstery of the front seat backrest . . . . . . . . 485
1.4 Removing and installing the heating element (heater cup) of the seat Z6 / Z8 . . . . . . . . . . 489
1.5 Removing and installing the heating element (heater cup) of the backrest Z7 / Z9 . . . . . . 489
2 Rear covers and seat upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
2.1 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
2.2 Removing andbyinstalling
Protected cover
copyright. Copying and or
for private seat upholstery
commercial purposes, in. part
. . or. .in.whole,
. . . is. .not. permitted
.................. 490
2.3 Removing
unlessand installing
authorised by ŠKODA entire
AUTO A. cover and
S. ŠKODA backrest
AUTO A. S. doesupholstery . . . .any
not guarantee or accept . .liability
................ 493
2.4 Summary of components - heating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
2.5 Removing and installing the heating element (heater cup) of the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
2.6 Removing and installing the heating element (heater cup) of the backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
2.7 Heated rear seat control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
viii Contents
00 – Technical data
1 General points
(SRL000931; Edition 04.2016)
1.1 Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number is type-punched into the right
wheelhouse frame side rail.
1. General points 1
The vehicle identification number can also be found at the bottom

left of the front window corner.
1 - Manufacturer's world code
TMB - Manufacturing plant Škoda
XW8 - Manufacturing plant in Russia
2 - Body type:
A - Sedan, left-hand drive, 4x2
B- Sedan, left-hand drive, 4x2
J - Combi, left-hand drive, 4x2
K - Combi, right-hand drive, 4x2
L - Combi, left-hand drive, 4x4
M - Combi, right-hand drive, 4x4
1 - vehicle category N1, left-hand drive, 4x2
2 - vehicle category N1, right-hand drive, 4x2
3 - vehicle category N1, left-hand drive, 4x4
4 - vehicle category N1, right-hand drive, 4x4
3 - Engine type:
A - 1.2 ltr./63 kW/petrol engine
B - 1.2 ltr./77 kW/petrol engine
C - 1.4 ltr./103 kW/petrol engine
D - 1.8 ltr./132 kW/petrol engine
E - 2.0 ltr./162 kW/petrol engine
F - 1.6 ltr. TDI/66 kW/diesel engine
G - 1.6l TDI/77, 81 kW/diesel engine
J - 2.0 ltr. TDI/105/110 kW/diesel engine
K - 2.0 ltr. TDI/135 kW/diesel engine
4 - Airbag System:
2 - 2 Front airbags
4 - 2 Front + 2 side airbags
5 - 2 front + 2 side + 1 knee airbag
6 - 2 front + 2 side + 2 head airbags
7 - 2 front + 2 side + 2 head + 1 knee airbag
8 - 2 front + 4 side + 2 head airbags
9 - 2 front + 4 side + 2 head + 1 knee airbag
B - total weight 1360 kg to 1814 kg
C - total weight 1814 kg to 2268 kg
5 - Vehicle type:
NE - OCTAVIA III
6 - Internal code
7 - Model year
D - 2013unless
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
2 Rep. gr.00 - Technical data

E - 2014
F - 2015
G - 2016
H - 2017
J - 2018
K - 2019
8 - Manufacturing plant:
0 - Mladá Boleslav
A - Aurangabad
B - Solomonovo
D - Ust-Kamenogorsk
H - Nižnij Novgorod, Gaz
U - India (vehicles manufactured in the Czech Republic for
Indi)a
9 - Chassis number
Note
♦ The identification of the body manufactured as spare part AUTO

is A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA
performed with the sign -#-with
in respect
front toand behind ofthe
the correctness vehicle
information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
identification number instead of the existing sign -*-.
♦ Current vehicle identification number ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet
Octavia III .
1. General points 3
50 – Body - front
1 Front body
⇒ “1.1 Tools”, page 4
⇒ “1.2 Lock carrier with components parts”, page 4
⇒ “1.3 Service position ”, page 5
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing lock carrier with component parts”,
page 7
⇒ “1.5 Front wing - Summary of components”, page 10
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing front wing”, page 10
⇒ “1.7 Removing and installing the wing support”, page 15
⇒ “1.8 Plenum chamber cover- Summary of components”,
page 16
⇒ “1.9 Bulkhead plenum chamber - Summary of components”,
page 17
⇒ “1.10 Damping of the plenum chamber - Summary of compo‐
nents”, page 19
⇒ “1.11 Noise insulation - Summary of components”, page 20
⇒ “1.13 Underfloor trim panel - Summary of components”,
page 21
⇒ “1.14 Tunnel bridge front - Summary of components”,
page 23
⇒ “1.15 Tunnel bridge rear - Summary of components”,
page 23
1.1 Tools
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Guide bars - T10093-
1.2 Lock carrier with components parts

Note
Depending on the model version, slight differences in the mounting parts are possible.
4 Rep. gr.50 - Body - front

1 - Lock carrier with compo‐

nents parts
❑ Service position
⇒ “1.3 Service position ”,
page 5 .
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.4 Removing and in‐
stalling lock carrier with
component parts”,
page 7 .
2 - Screw
❑ Tightening torque -
2.5 Nm.
3-
Air deflector
4 - Air deflector
5 - Screw
❑ Tightening torque:
8 Nm.
6 - Screw
55 Nm.
7 - Air guide duct
8 - Air deflector
9 - Bumper bracket
1.3 Service position

Adjusting the service position - installing and removing
Removing
1. Front body 5
– Removing front bumper

⇒ “1.1 Summary of components - Front bumper”, page 214 .
– Remove battery tray ⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr. 94 .
– Pull off the control cable from the lock carrier
⇒ “1.9 Separating the Bowden cable”, page 35 .
– Remove neck of the windscreen washer reservoir at the lock
carrier.
– Unclip the pipe from the air-conditioning unit (to the evapora‐
tor) from the right-hand lock carrier.
– Remove air guide (depending upon engine type)Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
⇒ Item 3 (page 5) . unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Remove the screws -3- at the left and right frame side rails.
– Install the guide bars - T10093- on the left and right frame side
rails.
– Remove top screws - 2 -.
– The lock carrier -1- can be pulled on the guide bars - T10093-
by approx. 10 cm forwards -arrows-.

Note
When removing the lock carrier, make sure the electrical cabling and other cables do not get damaged.
Install
– Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
Note
Hoses and lines must not be pinched.
1.4 Removing and installing lock carrier with

component parts
Removing
1. Front body 7
– Adjusting the service position

⇒ “1.3 Service position ”, page 5 .
– Separate electrical plug connections.
– Disconnect the intake hose to the air filter.
– Separate the coolant line and drain the coolant ⇒ Engine
cooling; Rep. gr. 19 .
– Separate the lines for the condensor ⇒ Heating and air con‐
ditioning system; Rep. gr. 87 .
– Remove the guide bars - T10093- at the left and right frame
side rails - 2 - with the help of a second mechanic and remove
the lock carrier with component parts - 1 -.
WARNING
If the cables of the air-conditioning system and/or the coolant

are separated, the drive unit must no longer be started.

Note
♦ Do not suspend the condenser to the wires.

♦ Do not bend the condenser lines.
Install
– Position the lock carrier - 1 - on the frame side rails - 2 -.

– Install the left and right guide bars - T10093- .
– Resetting service position ⇒ “1.3 Service position ”, page 5 .
Further installation occurs in reverse order.
– Take the mean ofProtected
the lock carrier at the frame side rails and
between the wings ⇒ authorised
Body Repairs; Rep.A.gr. 00 ; AUTO
technical
by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
unless by ŠKODA AUTO S. ŠKODA A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
data; body gaps; front bodyto.the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
with respect
1. Front body 9
1.5 Front wing - Summary of components
1 - Wing
❑ Removing
stalling front wing”, page
10 .
❑ Installing
10 .
2 - Screw
8 Nm.
3 - Interior trim
10 .
4 - Damping of interior trim
❑ Positioned in front of the
web plate.
5 - Foam part
❑ Inserted between the
wing and the front top
frame side rail.
6 - Nut
8 Nm.
7 - Wing support
stalling the wing sup‐
port”, page 15 . Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
1.6 Removing and installing front wing

Removing
– Remove front wheelhouse liner
⇒ “1.1 Removing and installing the front wheelhouse liner”,
page 252 .
– Pull out the foam part between the wing and the frame side
rail.
– Pull the damping of the interior trim out of the wheelhouse.
– Remove nut - 2 -.

– Undo the latches of the front wheelhouse liner - 1 - from the

wing - 3 -.
– Slightly pull the inner trim - 1 - in the lower area forwards and
lower.
–unless
Remove
Protected fixingCopying
by copyright. screws (3.5orNm)
for private - 2 -,purposes,
commercial whichinjoin the
part or bumper
in whole, is not permitted
with
with the towing.
respect the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
1. Front body 11
– Unscrew nuts - 6 -.
– Unscrew screws -2-.
Note
For this step the bumper holder -7- must not be removed.
– Cut through the glue sealing material

.
– Carefully remove the wing - 1 -.
Note
The removal of the wing begins at the A-pillar and ends at the bumper.
Install

Install
– respect
with The installation
to the correctnessof
of the wingin -this1 document.
information - occurs in thebyreverse
Copyright ŠKODA AUTO order.
A. S.�
– Tightening torque of screws -2- (8 Nm).

– Observe the parallelism and the correct gap sizes ⇒ Body Re‐
pairs; Rep. gr. 00 ; technical data; body gaps; front body .
Carry out the fitting with a loosened wing support.
Note
Fit fender stress-free.
Gluing the top part of the wing onto the A-pillar ⇒ page 12
1. Front body 13
Removing
– When removing the wing, cut through the glue sealing material
in the top part of the wing, e.g. with a cutting cord.
Install
– Cut away residues of old glue sealing material.
– Clean and degrease adhesive surfaces.
– The adhesive surface -2- is 18x18 mm and the amount of ad‐
hesive is approx. 3g.
– Before removing the wing - 1 -, apply glue sealing material
D 180003M2 to the point marked on the A-pillar - 3 - in area
- 2 -.

1.7 Removing and installing the wing support
Removing
Protected Note
When removing the left wing support, the battery ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 27 ; Electrical system; Removing
and installing battery and the battery tray ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 27 ; Electrical system; Removing and
installing battery carrier .
– Release the fixing screw of the headlight from the wing support
⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 94 .
– Release screws - 2 - and remove wing support - 3 -.
Install
– Install screws -4-.
– Fit the wing support - 3 - together with the wing - 1 - ⇒ Body
Repairs; Rep. gr. 00 ; technical data; body gaps; front body .
1. Front body 15
– Screw the fixing screw of the headlight into the wing support
⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 94 .
– Tightening torques of screws for wing support -3- (8 Nm).
1.8 Plenum chamber cover- Summary of components
1 - Plenum chamber cover

3 - Moulded foam part
❑ Adhered to wing.
4 - Gasket
5 - Moulded foam part
❑ Adhered to wing.
Removing
– Remove wiper arms ⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr. 92 .
– Remove the seal -4- along the entire length of the plenum
chamber cover.
– Remove the locating clips for the plenum chamber cover.
Caution
The plenum chamber coverbymust
unless authorised ŠKODA not beA.levered
AUTO S. ŠKODAoff AUTOwith a does
A. S. lever
not guarantee or accept any liability
tool (screwdriver,with
wedge). The washer is damaged and can
respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
subsequently tear.
– Manually raise the plenum chamber cover - 1 - towards the

centre of the vehicle to the edge of the glass on the right.

– Remove the plenum chamber cover - 1 - towards the top and

out of the fitting section.
– Remove the hose from the spray nozzle and unclip from the
clips in the plenum chamber cover.
– Pull out the plenum chamber cover - 2 - from the fitting section
towards the centre of the vehicle to the edge of the glass on
the left.
– Remove the hose from the spray nozzle and unclip from the
clips in the plenum chamber cover.
Install
Caution
Breaking open the plenum chamber cover in the fitting section

of the windscreen can lead to cracks in the windscreen.
Note
♦ An inlay is installed in the fitting section on new windscreens.

This inlay must be removed before installing the plenum cham‐
ber cover.
♦ The plenum chamber cover must be slightly pressed into the
fitting section by hand, but on no account knock or press in
using a tool.
Carry out the following tasks

– Spray the fitting section with soapy
Protectedwater so that
by copyright. theforplenum
Copying private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
chamber covers can be pressed in
unless more
authorised easily.
by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– First of all, position the plenum chamber cover - 2 - on the edge
of the glass on the left before centring to the openings accord‐
ing to the wiper shafts.
– Lightly press on the plenum chamber cover in the centre of the
vehicle towards the edge of the glass on the left until the cover
engages in the fitting section.
– Position the plenum chamber cover -1- on the cover -2- and
at the same time place the plenum chamber cover -1- at the
edge of the glass on the right.
– Lightly press on the plenum chamber cover in the centre of the
vehicle towards the edge of the glass on the right until the
cover engages in the fitting section.
– Press onto the seal - 4 -.
– Position the locating clips for the plenum chamber cover.
– Installing windscreen wipers ⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr.
92 .
Caution
The plenum chamber cover must not be levered off with a lever
tool (screwdriver, wedge). The washer is damaged and can
subsequently tear.
1.9 Bulkhead plenum chamber - Summary of components
1. Front body 17
1 - Bulkhead plenum chamber

2 - Nut
8 Nm.
Removing:
– Remove the plenum chamber cover
page 16 .
– Remove clips for damping of the plenum chamber.
– Take out the bulkhead plenum chamber.
Installing:
– Insert bulkhead plenum chamber.
– Screw in nuts - 2 -.
– Secure the damping of the plenum chamber with clips.
– Install plenum chamber cover
page 16 .

1.10 Damping of the plenum chamber - Summary of components
1 - Damping of the plenum

chamber
2 - Circlip
3 - Retaining clip
Removing
– Remove clips for damping of the plenum chamber - 2 -.
– Remove clips for damping of the plenum chamber - 3 -.
– Remove cable ties depending upon vehicle equipment.
– Remove the damping of the plenum chamber.
Install
– Insert the damping of the plenum chamber.
– Insert cable ties depending upon vehicle equipment.
– Insert clips for damping of the plenum chamber - 3 -.
– Insert clips for damping of the plenum chamber - 2 -.
1. Front body 19
1.11 Noise insulation - Summary of components
Note
Depending on the model version, slight differences must be taken into consideration when removing and in‐
stalling.
1 - Noise insulation
Removing
– Remove the screws -2-

and push out the noise
insulation towards the
rear.
Install
– Installation is carried out

in the reverse order.
2 - Screw
❑ Tightening torque: 1.5
Nm.

1.12 Summary of components - Noise insulation - diesel
Caution
Replace screws - 3 - after every removal!
1 - Noise insulation
Removing
– Remove screws - 2 -
and - 3 - and push out
the noise insulation to‐
wards the rear.
Install

2 - Screw
❑ Tightening torque: 2
Nm.
3 - Screw
Nm.
1.13 Underfloor trim panel - Summary of

components
Protected byNote
copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Depending on the model version, slight differences must be taken
into consideration when removing and installing.
1. Front body 21
1 - Floor covering
Removing
– Unscrew nuts -8-.
Install

2 - Floor covering
Removing
– Removing body-bound
rivet -5-.
– Release screws -7-.
Install

3 - Floor covering
Removing
– Unscrew nuts -8-.
Install

4 - Floor covering
Removing
– Removing body-bound rivet -5-.
Install
5 - Body-bound rivet
❑ To remove, push out the expanding bolts.
6 - Circlip
7 - Screw
❑ Tightening torque: 1.5 Nm.
8 - Nut
❑ Tightening torque: 2 Nm.

1.14 Tunnel bridge front - Summary of components
1 - Tunnel bridge
Removing
Install

2 - Screw
20 Nm.
1.15 Tunnel bridge rear - Summary of com‐

ponents
Removing
Note
With the rear tunnel bridge, partially remove the underfloor trim
panel - 3 - by hand.
– Remove the tunnel bridge - 1 - in - direction of arrow -.

Install
Tightening torque of screws -2- (20 Nm).
1. Front body 23
55 – Bonnet, rear lid

1 Front flap
⇒ “1.1 Summary of components”, page 24
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing the front flap”, page 25
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing the actuator for the front flap”,
page 27
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing the hinge for the pedestrian pro‐
tection system”, page 28
⇒ “1.5 Removing and installing the hinge for the front flap”, page
30
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing the support bar”, page 30
⇒ “1.7 Lock and unlock components of front flap - Summary of
components”, page 32
⇒ “1.8 Removing and installing front flap lock ”, page 32
⇒ “1.9 Separating the Bowden cable”, page 35
⇒ “1.10 Removing and installing the locking clamp”, page 36
⇒ “1.11 Removing and installing operating lever - Summary of
components”, page 37
⇒ “1.12 Removing and installing the operating lever ”, page 38
⇒ “1.13 Adjusting the front flap”, page 39
⇒ “1.14 Adjusting the flap lock”, page 40
⇒ “1.15 Adjusting the locking clamp”, page 41
1.1 Summary of components
24 Rep. gr.55 - Bonnet, rear lid

1 - Front flap
stalling the front flap”,
page 25 .
❑ Setting
⇒ “1.13 Adjusting the
front flap”, page 39 .
2 - Bump stop
❑ Height-adjustable by
turning.
3 - Seal for front flap
4 - Locking clamp
5 - Damping
Removing
– Unclip all the clips for

the damping in se‐
quence.
– Remove the damping

from the front flap.
Install

6 - Retaining clip
❑ For attaching the damp‐
ing.
7 - Plug
8 - Hinge
❑ Assignment ⇒ Electron‐
ic Catalogue of Original Parts .
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “1.5 Removing and installing the hinge for the front flap”, page 30 .
❑ Setting ⇒ “1.13 Adjusting the front flap”, page 39 .
9 - Actuator
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing the actuator for the front flap”, page 27 .
10 - Support bar
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing the support bar”, page 30 .
11 - Flap lock front flap
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “1.8 Removing and installing front flap lock ”, page 32 .
12 - Screw
13 - Screw
1.2
unless authorised Removing
by ŠKODA AUTO A. and installing the frontorflap
S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee accept any liability
Removing
1. Front flap 25
– Slacken the screws -3- on the left and right at the hinge -2- (do
not unscrew).
Carry out further removal only with the assistance of a second
mechanic.
– Remove support bar -4- from the front flap.
– Only now unscrew the screws - 3 - and lift the front flap - 1 -
out of the hinges - 2 -.
Install

Install
– Adjust front flap -1-
⇒ “1.13 Adjusting the front flap”, page 39 .
1.3 Removing and installing the actuator for

the front flap
Remove activated actuator
⇒ “6.1.1 Summary of components - hinges for the pedestrian pro‐
tection system after activation”, page 381 .
Remove not activated actuator.
WARNING
♦ Observe the general safety instructions for working on air‐

bag, belt tensioner and battery separation units (pyrotech‐
nical components).
♦ Pay attention to the notes ⇒ “3 Airbags”, page 340 .
1. Front flap 27
– Disconnect the vehicle battery ⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr.

27 ; disconnect and connect the battery .
– Remove seal for front flap
page 16 .
– Turn the plenum chamber cover (need not be removed) and
disconnect the plug connection for actuator.
– Remove nuts -2- (9 Nm).
– Remove the actuator - 1- from the front flap hinge.
– Unclip and remove the actuator cabling.
Install
– Connect the vehicle battery ⇒ Electrical System;
with Rep.
respect gr.
to the27 ;
correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
disconnect and connect the battery .
Tightening torque of the nuts -2- (9 Nm).
WARNING

nical components).
♦ Pay attention to the notes ⇒ “3 Airbags”, page 340 .
1.4 Removing and installing the hinge for

the pedestrian protection system
Set hinges for pedestrian protection system after activation into
the initial position

⇒ “6.1 Set hinges for pedestrian protection system into the initial
position after activation”, page 380 .
Removing
– Remove front flap - 3 -

⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing the front flap”, page 25 .
– Unscrew nuts -5-, remove the actuator, and place it to one side
(9 Nm).
– Remove hinge - 1 -.
Install
– Tightening torque of the nuts -5- (9 Nm).
1. Front flap 29
1.5 Removing and installing the hinge for

the front flap
Removing
– Remove front flap - 3 -
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing the front flap”, page 25 .
– Remove hinge - 1 -.
Note
To allow for the retrofitting of an actuator, some vehicles can be

fitted with hinges for the pedestrian protection system. In this
case, the opening for the actuator is covered with a cover.
Install
1.6 Removing and installing the support bar

Removing
– Support the front flap.
– Swivel the support bar - 1 - towards the front and pull the sup‐
port bar out of the rubber grommet - 2 -.
Install
– Push the support bar - 1 - into the grommet (Pos. 2) arrow
-a-.
– Swivel the support bar around towards the lock carrier - b -.
– Check the bracket -3- for damage, and replace where neces‐
sary.
1. Front flap 31
1.7 Lock and unlock components of front flap - Summary of components
1 - Locking clamp
❑ Removing
⇒ “1.10 Removing and
installing the locking
clamp”, page 36 .
❑ Setting.
⇒ “1.15 Adjusting the
locking clamp”,
page 41 .
2 - Release handle
installing the operating
lever ”, page 38 .
3 - Bowden cable
❑ From the Bowden cable
coupling to the operat‐
ing lever
installing operating lev‐ Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
er - Summary of compo‐ unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
nents”, page 37 . with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
4 - Retaining clip
5 - Bowden wire coupling
❑ The Bowden cable cou‐
pling is located above
the headlight on the
driver's side.
❑ Separate
⇒ “1.9 Separating the
Bowden cable”,
page 35 .
6 - Bowden cable
❑ From the front flap lock
to the Bowden cable
coupling.
❑ Clipped into the Bowden cable coupling.
7 - Flap lock front flap
❑ Remove and install front flap lock ⇒ “1.8 Removing and installing front flap lock ”, page 32 .
❑ Setting ⇒ “1.14 Adjusting the flap lock”, page 40 .
1.8 Removing and installing front flap lock
Note

into consideration when removing and installing the front flap lock.

Removing
Note
The Bowden cable -3- is not separated from the front flap lock.
– Open front flap.

– Separate the Bowden cable -3- in the Bowden cable coupling
– Depending on the equipment installed, disconnect the plug
connection for the contact switch of the front flap.
– Remove bolts - 2 - (12 Nm) and take out flap lock - 1 - from
lock carrier in direction of arrow - a -.
– Where necessary, unclip the end piece - 4 - of the Bowden
wire - 3 - out of the flap lock - 1 - arrow - a -.
1. Front flap 33
Note
Depending on the equipment installed, remove and install the contact switch for the front flap at the flap lock
⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr. 96 .
Install
– Clip in the end piece - 4 - of the Bowden wire - 3 - into the flap
lock (if was removed) arrow - a -.
– Guide the flap lock - 1 - into the lock carrier arrow - b - .
– Depending on the additional equipment, connect the plug con‐
nection for the contact switch of the engine hood.
– Install the Bowden cable -3- in the Bowden cable coupling
– Adjust flap lock ⇒ “1.14 Adjusting the flap lock”, page 40 .

1.9 Separating the Bowden cable
Removing
– Unclip the Bowden cable coupling - 2 -, located above the
headlight on the driver's side, out of the lock carrier arrow
-a-.
– Remove Bowden cables - 1 - and - 4 - out of the Bowden cable
coupling - 2 -byarrow
Protected - aCopying
copyright. -. for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Swivel the Bowden cable - 1 - about 90° in direction of arrow
- b - and take the Bowden cable in direction of arrow - c - out
of the support of the Bowden cable.
Install
1. Front flap 35
Note
♦ When installing the Bowden cable - 4 -, ensure that the grommet - 5 - is correctly secured.
♦ When attaching the Bowden cable - 4 -, pay attention to the mandatory clipping - 3 -.
1.10 Removing and installing the locking clamp
Removing
– Remove the locking clamp - 1 - from the front flap - 2 -.
Install
– Adjust the locking clamp to the flap lock
⇒ “1.15 Adjusting the locking clamp”, page 41 .

1.11 Removing and installing operating lever - Summary of components
1 - Bearing bracket
2 - Bowden cable
Removing
– Take Bowden cable

- 2 - out of the bearing
bracket - 1 -.
– Turn the Bowden cable

so that the ball of the
Bowden cable can be
removed from the bear‐
ing bracket lever.
– Remove the ball from

the bearing bracket lev‐
er.
Install

3 - Adjusting nut
4 - Screw
2 Nm.
5 - Release handle
installing the operating
lever ”, page 38 .
1. Front flap 37
1.12 Removing and installing the operating lever
Removing
– Tighten the operating lever -1- and unlock the front flap.
– Fit a small screwdriver into the gap between the operating
lever - 1 - and the retaining clip - 2 -.
– Lever the retaining clip -2- out of the operating lever (Pos. 1)
-arrow- and detach the operating lever from the bearing brack‐
et -3-.
When carrying out further work on the bearing bracket - 3 -, re‐
move the bottom A pillar trim panel - 4 -.
Install
– Push the retaining clip -2- into the operating lever.
– Press the operating lever - 1 - onto the bearing bracket - 3 -.

1.13 Adjusting the front flap
Note
♦ The vehicle must be positioned on the flat ground in order to adjust the front flap.
♦ The adjusting buffers -2- on the left and right are not used for the adjustment. They have the function to
stabilise or dampen the front flap.
♦ The front flap is correctly adjusted if in the closed state it has an overall even gap size, is not positioned too
far outwards or inwards and the contours are aligned.
♦ The front flap must latch in the flap lock without using increased force.
♦ The screws are not unscrewed, only slackened.
– Remove locking clamp - 1 -

⇒ “1.10 Removing and installing the locking clamp”,
page 36 .
– The mean of the front flap can be taken between the wings by
loosening the screws -6- on the left and right hinges -5-.
– Ensure that the gap sizes are uniform: ⇒ Body Repairs; Rep.
gr. 00 ; Technical data; body gaps; front body .
1. Front flap 39
Adjusting the adjusting buffer
Note
♦ Install the adjusting buffer -2- on the left and right up to the stop.
♦ Turn the adjusting buffers by 90° if required, in order to pretension the flap.
– After the front flap has been adjusted, the locking clamp -1-
can once again be mounted and adjusted
– The front flap can be adjusted in the front area to the height of
the wings with the flap lock -4-
⇒ “1.14 Adjusting the flap lock”, page 40 .
– After the flap has been adjusted, the locking clamp has been
installed and all the connections have been tightened, the ad‐
justing buffers can be turned if required.
– After carrying out adjustment work, perform corrosion protec‐
tion measures on the hinges - 6 - and the screws - 5 -.
1.14 Adjusting the flap lock

– When undoing the screws - 2 -, the front flap lock - 1 - can be

set laterally to the front flap - arrow - a - and at the height arrow
- b - ⇒ Body Repairs; Rep. gr. 00 ; Body gaps; front body .
– Tightening torque of screws (Pos. 2) - 12 Nm.
1.15 Adjusting the locking clamp
– Release screws - 3 -.
– The locking clamp -1- can now be adjusted in the oversized
holes.
1. Front flap 41
2 Tailgate
⇒ “2.1 Summary of components ”, page 42
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing tailgate”, page 43
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing the closing wedge”, page 44
⇒ “2.4 Adjusting tailgate”, page 44
⇒ “2.5 Adjusting the closing wedge”, page 46
⇒ “2.6 Adjusting the rubber buffer”, page 46
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing the tailgate lock ”, page 46
⇒ “2.8 Removing and installing pressurized gas strut of tailgate”,
page 47
⇒ “2.9 Removing and installing the spindle drive of the tailgate
(Octavia III - Combi)”, page 48
⇒ “2.10 Seal for tailgate - Mounting instructions”, page 49
1 - Screw
8 Nm.
2 - Wedge buffer
3 - Tailgate trim panel
stalling the tailgate trim
panel ”, page 420 . Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
4 - Tailgate with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�

stalling tailgate”,
page 43 .
❑ Setting
⇒ “2.4 Adjusting tail‐
gate”, page 44 .
5 - Rubber buffer
❑ Setting
⇒ “2.6 Adjusting the rub‐
ber buffer”, page 46 .
6 - Ball stud
– Tightening torque:
20 Nm.
7 - Pressurized gas strut

– Removing and installing
stalling pressurized gas
strut of tailgate”,
page 47 .

2.2 Removing and installing tailgate

Removing
– Removeunless
the tailgate
with respect to thetrim panelof information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
correctness
⇒ “6.1 Removing and installing the tailgate trim panel ”,
page 420 .
– Disconnect the plug connections of the existing electrical com‐
ponents.
– Thread the electrical cables out of the tailgate.
– Slacken the screws - 3 - (10 Nm) on the left and right hinges
but do not yet unscrew.
Carry out further removal only with the assistance of a second
mechanic.
– Remove pressurized gas struts from the ball pins on the tail‐
gate
⇒ “2.8 Removing and installing pressurized gas strut of tail‐
gate”, page 47 .
– Only now unscrew the screws - 3 - and remove the tailgate.
2. Tailgate 43
– Only if the complete hinge for the tailgate must be removed,

release the nuts - 2 - (20 Nm). In this case the moulded head‐
liner must be unhooked
⇒ “10.1 Removing and installing moulded headliner”,
page 439 .
Install
Note
Adjust the tailgate after installing ⇒ “2.4 Adjusting tailgate”, page 44 .
2.3 Removing and installing the closing

wedge
Removing
– Unscrew screw -2- and remove the closing wedge -1- from the
luggage compartment wall.
Install
– Adjust closing wedge
⇒ “2.5 Adjusting the closing wedge”, page 46 .
2.4 Adjusting tailgate
Note
♦ The vehicle must be standing on its wheels in order to adjust the tailgate.
♦ The flap lock is directly screwed onto the tailgate. It has no elongated holes and therefore it cannot be
adjusted. Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
♦ The adjusting buffers on the left and right are not used for the adjustment. They have the function to stabilise
or dampen the tailgate.
♦ The tailgate is correctly adjusted if in the closed state it has an overall even gap size, is not positioned too
far inwards or outwards and the contours are aligned.
♦ The tailgate must latch in the flap lock without using increased force.

Use a setting gauge for setting or checking the gap sizes ⇒ Body
Repairs; Rep. gr. 00 ; body gaps; rear body .
– The tailgate can be adjusted in the oversized bores of the
hinges horizontally and vertically by slackening the screws
- 3 -.
Tightening torque of screw -3- (10 Nm).
– After carrying out adjustment work, perform corrosion protec‐
tion measures at the hinges and screws.
– Adjust the tailgate on the closing wedge
⇒ “2.5 Adjusting the closing wedge”, page 46 .
– Adjust the rubber buffer on the left and right
⇒ “2.6 Adjusting the rubber buffer”, page 46 .
2. Tailgate 45
2.5 Adjusting the closing wedge
Note
♦ The closing wedge - 2 - can be adjusted in the oversized bores

of the hinges arrows - a - and arrows - b - by loosening the
screws - 1 -.
♦ Set the closing latch -2- in such a way that the recess of the
tailgate lock with the catch engages centrally in the closing
latch -2-.
– Release screws - 1 -.
– Bring the closing wedge - 2 - into the upper position and tighten
the screws - 1 -.
– Close the tailgate and check the setting.
Tightening torque of screws -1- (20 Nm).
2.6 Adjusting the rubber buffer

– Adjust the rubber buffer -2- in such a way that no excessive
forces must be used when closing the tailgate -1- and that it
engages in the lock.
2.7 Removing and installing the tailgate lock
Note
If the tailgate does not open, its emergency release can be

opened mechanically from the outside via the lock cylinder ⇒
Owner's manual .
Removing

– Remove the tailgate trim panel

page 420 .
– Remove lock cover - 3 -.
– Disconnect the plug connection from the tailgate lock control
- 1 -.
– Release the nuts -2- (21 Nm) and remove the flap lock -1- from
the tailgate.
Install
2.8 Removing and installing pressurized

gas strut of tailgate
Removing
– Open tailgate, support and lock it into position.
2. Tailgate 47
– Use a screwdriver to raise the locking element - 2 - and pull

the pressurized gas strut - 1 - off the ball stud - 3 -.
Note
If the pressurized gas strut is to be re-used, do not remove the

locking device fully from the ball socket, otherwise it will be dam‐
aged.
– 1 - Pressurized gas strut

– 2 - Locking device
– 3 - Ball stud
Install
2.9 Removing and installing the spindle

drive of the tailgate (Octavia III - Combi)
Note
Functional description of the system e.g. ⇒ Vehicle Operating

Instructions .
Removing Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Switch off the ignition andwith
allrespect
electrical components.
to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
– Open tailgate, support and lock it into position.

– Disconnect the plug connections of the spindle drive under the
D trim panel
⇒ “5 Removing and installing the D column trim (Octavia III -
Combi)”, page 418 and pull the cable guide -3- through the
grommet.
– Use a screwdriver to unlock the locking element - 4 - and pull
the spindle drive - 1 - off the ball stud - 2 -.
WARNING
Always move the release pin into the first stage. Never fully
lever it out of the ball socket. There is risk of injury to the me‐
chanic and risk of damage to the release pin!
– Ball stud (20 Nm) -2-.

Install
Note
The end positions must be adjusted with ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic

tester after installing the spindle drive.

2.10 Seal for tailgate - Mounting instructions

♦ If the seal is re-installed, leak-tightness and tight fit can no
longer be guaranteed.
♦ For this reason, each seal which was completely removed
must be replaced with a so-called “hammer finish seal”.
♦ If the seals were detached partially, press together the sides
of the seal before installing.
2.11 Removing and installing tailgate seal
Removing
– Pay attention to installation instructions
⇒ “2.10 Seal for tailgate - Mounting instructions”, page 49 .
– Detach the seal for the tailgate -1- from the body flange.
Install
– Press the seal -1- evenly onto the body flange.
2. Tailgate 49
3 Fuel tank lid unit

⇒ “3.1 Fuel-tank lid unit - Summary of components”, page 50
⇒ “3.2 Removing and installing fuel tank lid unit”, page 50
3.1 Fuel-tank lid unit - Summary of components
1 - Screw
❑ 1.5 ± 0.2 Nm
2 - Fuel tank lid unit
stalling fuel tank lid unit”,
page 50 .
3 - Drain hose
❑ Laid between the wheel‐
house and the wheel‐
house liner.
3.2 Removing and installing fuel tank lid unit

Removing
– Remove screw ⇒ Item 1 (page 50) .
– Lever out the fuel tank lid unit in steps using a plastic wedge
-A-.
– Remove the rubber grommet from the fuel filler neck.
– Pull out the fuel tank lid unit.
Install

57 – Front doors, door components, central locking

1 Front door
⇒ “1.1 Door hinges - Summary of components”, page 51
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing the door”, page 52
⇒ “1.3 Door adjustment”, page 55
1.1 Door hinges - Summary of components
1 - Door
stalling the door”,
page 52 .
❑ Setting
⇒ “1.3 Door adjust‐
ment”, page 55 .
2 - Screw with internal serra‐
tions
❑ 40 Nm.
3 - Door hinge
❑ The hinge is divided.
❑ The top part is connec‐
ted to the bottom part of
the hinge by the screw
- 4 -.
4 - Screw
❑ This screw
Protected must be
by copyright. un‐ for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Copying
screwed in order
unless authorised to re‐AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
by ŠKODA
move the door from the
hinge.
❑ 23 Nm.
tions
❑ Installed from the inside
of the vehicle.
❑ Remove bottom A-pillar
trim panel.
❑ 25 Nm.
6 - Door hinge
❑ The bottom part is con‐
nected to the top part of the hinge by the screw - 4 -.
7 - Screw with internal serrations
❑ 25 Nm.
8 - Screw
❑ 30 Nm.
❑ This screw must be unscrewed in order to remove the door.
1. Front door 51
9 - Door retaining strap

10 - Screw
❑ 9 Nm.
❑ Installed from the inside of the vehicle.
❑ Remove and install the dash panel for loosening or tightening the screw on the driver's side.
❑ Remove and install the dash panel for loosening or tightening the screw on the front passenger side.
❑ 25 Nm.
12 - Door hinge
❑ The bottom part is connected to the top part of the hinge by the screw - 16 -.
❑ 25 Nm
❑ 40 Nm.
15 - Door hinge Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
❑ The top part is connected to unless
the bottom
authorised part of the
by ŠKODA AUTOhinge by the
A. S. ŠKODA AUTOscrew - 12not-.guarantee or accept any liability
A. S. does
16 - Screw
❑ 23 Nm.
❑ This screw must be screwed down in order to remove the door from the hinge bolt.
1.2 Removing and installing the door

♦ Wedge - T10383/1-
Removing
52 Rep. gr.57 - Front doors, door components, central locking

– Press the wedge - T10383/1- between collar - 3 - and catch

- 2 -, arrow - a - .
– Press out upwards the catch - 2 - with the wedge - T10383/1-
arrow - b - and disconnect the plug connection.
– Undo screws - 7 - at the hinges - arrow - e - .
– Remove the screws - 4 - for the door retaining strap - 5 -.
– Move door retaining strap - 6 - in direction of arrow - d - towards
the inside.
– Lever door - 1 - out of hinges in direction of arrow - f -.
Install
1. Front door 53
Install
– Installation is carried out in the Protected
reverse by order.
– Tightening torque screws (Pos. 7)
with- respect
23 Nm. to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
– Tightening torque screws (Pos. 4) - 30 Nm.

– Observe the gap sizes of the front door ⇒ Body Repairs; Rep.
gr. 00 ; technical data; body gaps; front body .

1.3 Door adjustment
Note
♦ The vehicle must be standing on its wheels in order to adjust the door.
♦ The door is correctly adjusted if in the closed state it has an overall even gap size, is not positioned too far
outwards or inwards and the contours are aligned.
♦ To check the gap size: ⇒ Body Repairs; Rep. gr. 00 ; Technical data; body gaps; front body .
♦ After carrying out removal and installation or adjustment work, perform corrosion protection measures at
the screws and hinges.
Setting the gap sizes

In order to correctly set the gap sizes, the screws
-2, 5, 7, and 8- must be slackened at the A pillar.
– The bottom A pillar trim panel must be removed for slackening
the screw - 5 -: .
– The dash panel must be removed on the driver's
Protected side
by copyright. forforthe
Copying private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
screw - 7 -. unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
1. Front door 55
– The glove compartment must be removed on the front pas‐

senger side for the screw - 7 -.
The screws -3 and 9- must be released for correctly setting the
flushness.
Note
Other measures, such as aligning the doors towards the top are ineffective. The door will drop again at the
following overpressures.
Adjusting the locking clamp:


Note
♦ The arc outside the threaded plate must be firmly welded to the pillar. The lands to the threaded plate are
malleable.
♦ In order to adjust the locking clamp -2- once the screws -3- are loosened, increased force must be applied.
Note
♦ When closing the door it must lock completely without using

additional force and must have no play.
♦ When adjusting the locking clamp, the door must not be press‐
ed upwards or downwards.
The locking clamp is used for adjusting the following:

• If the front door adjustment is not flush with the rear door or
the side part.
– Slacken the locking clamp -1- by loosening the screws -2- at
the B pillar.
– Adjust the door with the locking clamp -2- in such a way that
the front door when in the closed state is flush with the rear
door (wind noise).
– Tighten screws - 2 - of locking clamp - 1 -.
Tightening torques: Screws -2- (20 Nm).
1. Front door 57
2 Door internal parts

⇒ “2.1 Front door - Summary of components ”, page 58
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing the door cover”, page 59
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing the door retaining strap”,
page 61
⇒ “2.5 Door handle and door lock - Summary of components ”,
page 62
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing cap for lock cylinder”, page 63
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing lock cylinder”, page 64
⇒ “2.8 Removing and installing cap (without lock cylinder) ”, page
66
⇒ “2.9 Removing and installing the door handle”, page 69
⇒ “2.10 Removing and installing the door lock”, page 71
⇒ “2.11 Removing and installing bearing bracket”, page 73
⇒ “2.12 Front door window - Summary of components”,
page 76
⇒ “2.13 Removing and installing door window”, page 76
⇒ “2.14 Removing and installing window lifter motor”, page 80
⇒ “2.16 Remove and install window lifter”, page 83
⇒ “2.17 Removing and installing the window run”, page 85
⇒ “2.18 Removing and installing the inner window channel strip”,
page 88
⇒ “2.19 Removing and installing the outer window channel strip”,
page 90
⇒ “2.20 Removing and installing the inside door seal”,
page 91 Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
⇒ “2.21 Removing and installing
with respect to thethe outside
correctness door seal”,
of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
page 93
2.1 Front door - Summary of components

1 - Door
page 52 .
❑ Setting
ment”, page 55 .
2 - Riveted nuts
3 - Adhesive pad
4 - Outside door seal
installing the outside
door seal”, page 93 .
5 - Cover
stalling the door cover”,
page 59 .
6 - Inner window channel strip
installing the inner win‐
dow channel strip”,
page 88 .
7 - External window channel
strip
installing the outer win‐
page 90 .
8 - Foam piece
9 - Window run
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.17 Removing and installing the window run”, page 85 .
2.2 Removing and installing the door cover

Removing
2. Door internal parts 59

– Remove front door trim panel

⇒ “2.1 Removing and installing the front door trim panel on the
driver's side”, page 398 .
– Lift off the cover -3- in the bottom area.
– Pull the cover - 3 - downwards and remove it from the door
- 4 -.
Note
If the following operations are necessary, pull the Bowden cable - 1 - with the grommet - 2 - out of the cover
- 3 -.
Install

2.3 Removing and installing the door retaining strap
Removing
– Remove the screw - 2 - at the A pillar.
– Remove the plastic door cover above the loudspeaker and re‐
move the door retaining strap - 1 -.
– Remove the door retaining strap through the opening.
Install
– Insert the door retaining strap through the opening for the door
cover.
– Install screws - 3 -, tightening
unless torque
authorised 9
byNm.
ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Install screws - 2 -, tightening torque 30 Nm.
– Fit plastic door cover above the loudspeaker.

– Installing door trim panel at front

2.4 Removing and installing the locking

clamp
Removing
– Release screws - 2 - and remove locking clamp - 1 -.
Install
– Position the locking clamp - 1 - at the B pillar - 3 - and tighten
the screws - 2 -, tightening torque: 25 Nm.
– Adjusting the locking clamp.
2.5 Door handle and door lock - Summary of components
1 - Door lock
installing the door lock”,
page 71 . unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
2 - Screw
❑ For lock cylinder.
Nm.
3 - Bearing bracket
installing bearing brack‐
et”, page 73 .
4 - Lock cylinder
stalling lock cylinder”,
page 64 .
❑ A lock cylinder is located
only on the driver's door.
5 - Washer
6 - Cap
❑ Different versions, as‐
signment ⇒ Electronic
Catalogue of Original
Parts .
❑ Remove and install with
lock cylinder
stalling cap for lock cyl‐
inder”, page 63 .
❑ Remove and install
without lock cylinder
⇒ “2.8 Removing and installing cap (without lock cylinder) ”, page 66 .

7 - Door handle
❑ Different versions, assignment ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts .
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.9 Removing and installing the door handle”, page 69 .
8 - Screw
❑ The bearing bracket is released from the door by loosening the screw.
9 - Control cable
❑ From door lock to bearing bracket.
10 - Control cable
❑ From inner door control to lock release.
❑ With grommet for feeding through at the cover.
11 - Screw
12 - Cap
2.6 Removing and installing cap for lock cyl‐

inder
Note
When removing the cap for the lock cylinder, do not turn or lever
the screwdriver.
Removing
– Detach door handle.
– Press a small screwdriver - 3 - slightly arrow - a - into the
opening on the bottom side of the cap for the lock cylinder.
– Slightly pull off the cap of the lock cylinder - 1 -, together with
the screwdriver, at the bottomunless
sideauthorised
from the doorAUTO- b -.A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
by ŠKODA
– Slide the cap upwards from the lock cylinder.

Install
– Remove door handle - 1 -.
– Place the cap of the lock cylinder - 2 - slightly angled from
above - arrow - a - onto the lock cylinder.
– Press the cap of the lock cylinder - 2 - onto the door arrow
- b -, until the cap with the lock cylinder locks into position.
2.7 Removing and installing lock cylinder
Note
A lock cylinder is installed only on the driver's door.
Removing

– Lift off the covers -4 and 6- or cover - 7 -.

– Unscrew screw - 5 -.
– Fully unscrew the screw -8- so that it exposes the lock cylinder.
– Remove door handle - 2 -.
– Undo the locking cylinder housing - 1 - at a right angle arrow
- b - to the door from the bearing bracket - 3 -.
Install

– Undo door handle - 2 - arrow - a - .

– Insert the locking cylinder housing - 1 - at a right angle arrow
- b - into the bearing bracket - 3 -.
– Screw the screws -5 and 8- into the bearing bracket.
– Tightening torque of screw -8- (2.2 Nm).
Note
During the assembly the lock cylinder housing must be pressed against the outer door panel.
2.8 Removing and installing cap (without

lock cylinder)
Tools Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Special tools and workshop equipment
with respect required

♦ Assembly tool - T10389-
Removing
– Remove the plugs from the rear openings - 3 -.

– Guide the assembly tool - T10389- by approx. 55 mm into the
door behind the lock hooks -2- of the bearing bracket.
– Pull the assembly tool - T10389- as far towards the rear
-arrow-, until the hook on the bearing bracket unlocks.

– Remove the door handle - 2 - in direction of arrow - a - from

the door.
– Swivel out the cap - 1 - from the bearing bracket arrow - b - .
Install
– Remove the door handle - 2 - in direction of arrow - a - from
the door.
– Push the cap -1- into the bearing bracket -arrow b-.

– Guide the screwdriver -4- at the lock hook -3- of the bearing
bracket.
– Press the cap -1- on the door.
– Press in the screwdriver -arrow- until the hook locks.
– Attach plug - 5 -.
2.9 Removing and installing the door handle

Removing

– Remove the lock cylinder

⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing lock cylinder”, page 64 or the
cap
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing cap for lock cylinder”,
page 63 .
– Pull the door handle - 1 - slightly towards the rear arrow - a -
out of the support of the bearing bracket.
– Swivel the door handle in direction of arrow - b -.
– Remove the door handle at a right angle arrow - a - out of the
bearing bracket - 2 -.
Install

– Insert the door handle - 1 - at a right angle arrow - b - into the

bearing bracket.
– Swivel the door handle - 1 - into the door arrow - b -.
– Forcefully press the door handle forwards arrow - c -into the
support of the bearing bracket.
Install the lock cylinder
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing lock cylinder”, page 64 or the cap
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing cap for lock cylinder”, page 63 .
2.10 Removing and installing the door lock

Removing


– Remove the cover
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing the door cover”, page 59 .
– Unclip cap - 3 -.
– Unplug connector -4-.
– Remove lock cylinder
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing lock cylinder”, page 64 .
– Remove the lock -1- from the door.
Note
If it is necessary for the following operations, you can slacken the Bowden cable.
Slacken Bowden cable to bearing bracket

– Twist the Bowden cable - 5 - by 45° and remove it from the
bracket - a -.

– Turn the Bowden cable - b - until it can be guided out of the

lug in the door lock (Pos. 1) arrow - c -.
Slacken the Bowden cable to the inner door control:
– Twist the Bowden cable -6- by 45° and remove it from the
bracket.
– Turn the Bowden cable - d - until it can be guided out of the
lug in the door lock (Pos. 1) arrow - e -.
Install
Install
It is absolutely necessary to perform a functional check because
the door cannot be opened if the adjustment of the Bowden cables
is not accurate and if they are not correctly locked.
2.11 Removing and installing bearing bracket

Removing

– Remove the door
– Remove the lock cylinder
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing lock cylinder”, page 64 or the
cap
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing cap for lock cylinder”,
page 63 .
– Removing the door handle
⇒ “2.9 Removing and installing the door handle”, page 69 .
– Release screw - 4 - and remove gasket - 3 -.
– Remove bearing bracket - 1 - from the door arrow - a -.
Slacken Bowden cableProtected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Unlock the bracket - with
5 -respect
and swivel out ofofthe
to the correctness support
information in thisin the Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
document.
bearing bracket arrow - b -.
– Lift the bolt of the control cable out of the support - c -.
– Swivel out the Bowden cable - 2 - from the bearing bracket
(Pos. 1) arrow - d - .

Install

– Install screws - 2 -, tightening torque: 1.5 Nm.

2.12 Front door window - Summary of components
1 - Door window
installing door window”,
page 76 .
2 - Window lifter
⇒ “2.16 Remove and in‐
stall window lifter”, page
83 .
3 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm.
4 - Door
5 - Window lifter motor
installing window lifter
motor”, page 80 .
6 - Screw
❑ 3 Nm.
7 - Window run
installing the window
run”, page 85 .
2.13 Removing and installing door window

Removing


– Remove inner window channel strip
⇒ “2.18 Removing and installing the inner window channel
strip”, page 88 .
– Release cap - 4 -.
– Remove cover - 5 -
– Lower
unless authorisedthe door AUTO
by ŠKODA window - 1 - so
A. S. ŠKODA thatA. the
AUTO catches
S. does - 2 -orare
not guarantee visible
accept any liability
in the openings on the impellers of the runners - 3 -.
– Press the catch at the point of the -arrow- towards the inside
and thereby unlock the door window - 2 - using for example a
screwdriver. Perform the same at the second catch.
Note
♦ If this operation cannot be performed due to a failure at the power-window lifter, remove the motor
⇒ “2.14 Removing and installing window lifter motor”, page 80 (depending upon vehicle equipment).
♦ Then the door window can be pushed to the required working height.

– Lift up the door pane -1- at the rear and swivel it forwards out
of the window run -2- in -direction of arrow-.
Install

– Insert door pane - 1 - in direction of arrow - a - into the window

run - 2 -.
Note
Ensure that the door window is correctly inserted in the window run.
– Guide the door window pressureless into the clamping jaws

- b -. Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Align the door with
pane to tothe
respect the window frame
correctness of arrow
information in this-document.
c -. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�

– Apply gentle pressure to both sides of the door window while

pressing evenly into the catches until it audibly locks into
place.
– Subsequently proceed in reverse order to removing.
2.14 Removing
unless authorisedand installing
by ŠKODA window
AUTO A. S. ŠKODA lifter
AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
motor
Removing


– Secure the door window with adhesive tape so that it does not
slide off.
– Remove the window lifter motor with the control unit - 1 - from
the supports - 3 -.
Install
WARNING
On a newly installed window lifter motor (door control unit), the
auxiliary functions and the closing force limitation must be co‐
ded!

– Fit the window lifter motor - 1 - into the supports - 3 -. Raise

the door window and then lower it so that the serration can
slide in better between the motor and the hoisting drum.
– Install screws -2- (3 Nm).
– Secure the plug connection - 4 -.
– The new window lifter motor is coded.
– After the coding, the window lifter motor can be automatically
raised up to the stop. Pull out the switch once more for 2 sec‐
onds. The window lifter motor can detect its upper stop through
this.
– The further work procedure occurs in the reverse order to the
removal.
2.15 Removing and installing control unit

– Door trim panel has been removed.

– Press the retaining lug of the door control unit in

-direction of arrow A-, swivel the control unit in
-direction of arrow B- and pull the control unit in
-direction of arrow C- out of the door assembly carrier.
Install
2.16 Remove and install window lifter

Removing

– Remove door window
⇒ “2.13 Removing and installing door window”, page 76 .

– Remove window lifter motor

⇒ “2.14 Removing and installing window lifter motor”,
page 80 .
– Unlock the catches of the hoisting drum arrows - d - and fit
them into the door.
– Slide the window lifter - 1 - into the door and slightly turn it in
direction of arrow - a -
– Remove window lifter out of the door cutout arrow - b - and
arrow - c -.
Install
– Slide window lifter - 2 - through the door cutout arrow - a -.

– Put the window lifter in its fitting position - b -.
– Push the window lifter thread through the door arrow - c - and
tighten the nuts - 4 -. Tightening torque: 8 Nm.
– Press the hoisting drum - 1 - through the holes in the door until
the catch hooks arrow - d - lock.

2.17 Removing and installing the window run
Note
Do not bend the window seal while removing!
Removing
– Remove exterior mirror
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing exterior mirror (electric oper‐
ating lever)”, page 262 .
– Lower door window into the lower position.
– Remove window run from the pillar and remove the screws
- 2 -.
– Remove B-pillar trim panel - 1 -.

– Push away the sealing lip of the window run -1- from the inside
out of the door flange.
– Remove window run - 1 - evenly all the way round arrows
- a - from the door flange.
– Pull the window run - 1 - out of the supports arrows - b - .
Install

– Slide the window run into the supports arrows - a -.

– Press the window run evenly all around against the door flange
-3-.
– Press the sealing lip of the door run from the inside against the
door flange - 3 -.
– Remove window run in column compartment.
– Insert column trim -1- and install screws -2- (2.5 Nm).

– Mount window run to door flange in the column compartment.
Note
Pay attention to evenly fitting the window run when installing it

(wind noise).
2.18 Removing and installing the inner win‐

dow channel strip
Note
Remove the seal evenly and without bending it towards the top.

Removing
– Detach window channel strip - 1 - evenly - arrows - from the
flange - 2 -.
Install
Press the window channel strip - 1 - by hand evenly onto the
flange - 2 -.

2.19 Removing and installing the outer win‐

dow channel strip
Removing
Note
♦ The core of the seal consists of a metal insert.

♦ If it is bent, the seal can no longer be straightened. It remains
“warped”.
♦ Therefore the seal must be fitted on uniformly and without
bending it.
– Remove seal - 1 - arrows - b - out of the door - 2 - evenly as

far as the exterior mirror.
– Pull out the seal from underneath the exterior mirror - a -.
Install

– Slide the seal underneath the exterior mirror - b -.

– Press the seal - 1 - arrows - a - by hand evenly onto the flange
- 2 -.
2.20 Removing and installing the inside door

seal
During the installation in series, the inside door seals are provided
with a sealing compound which is placed on the door flange and
subsequently rolled up.
Note
♦ During the removal of the seal, the sealing mass is distributed

on the inside of the seal. While doing so, the sides are slightly
bent open. If the seal is re-installed, leak-tightness and tight fit
can no longer be guaranteed.

Removing
– Remove the trim panels of the pillars for removing the inside
door seal ⇒ “3 Trim panels of pillars”, page 404 .
– Detach the inside door seal -1- from the body flange.
Install
– Align the inside door seal - 1 - with vulcanisation point arrow
- b - at the top bonnet hinge arrow - b -.
– When installing the inside door seal, start in the top radius of
the door cutout arrow - a -.

2.21 Removing and installing the outside door seal
Removing
– Unclip the outside door seal - 4 - with the clips - 3 - and clip
- 2 - from the door - 1 -.
Install
– Press the outside door seal - 4 - with the clips - 3 - and clip
- 2 - from the door - 1 -.
Note
Check the clips -3- and -2- for damage, if necessary
with respect replace
to the correctness them.in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
of information

3 Central locking system

⇒ “3.1 Removing and installing the battery for the ignition key”,
page 94 .
⇒ “3.2 Removing and installing the cap on the ignition key”, page
94 .
3.1 Removing and installing the battery for

the ignition key
Removing
– Fold open the key bit -1- -arrow a-.
– Use a small screwdriver -3- to lift the cover of the battery com‐
partment -2- -arrow a-.
– Use a small screwdriver -3- to lift the battery -1- out of the
battery compartment -2- -arrow-.
Install
Note
♦ Before installing the battery, you must press a random button

once.
♦ This resets the transmitter unit to as-new condition, so that a
new battery can be detected.
Observe the polarity and the fitting location when installing the
battery. The positive pole is indicated.
– Insert theProtected
battery -1- withCopying
by copyright. slightforpressure -arrowpurposes,
private or commercial a- intoin part
theor in whole, is not permitted
battery compartment
unless authorised by-2-.
– Clip together the cover of the battery compartment -3- and the
transmitter unit -arrow b-.
3.2 Removing and installing the cap on the ignition key

Removing
– Remove the cover for the battery
⇒ “3.1 Removing and installing the battery for the ignition key”,
page 94 .
– Release screw -1-.
– Slide cap -2- out of the ignition key in -direction of arrow-.
Install
Note
A thread is cut out of the new cap with a screw -1-.
– Push the cap -2- into the ignition key.

– Clip on the battery cover. Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
3. Central locking system 95

58 – Rear doors, door components

1 Rear door
⇒ “1.1 Rear door - Summary of components”, page 96
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing the door”, page 97
⇒ “1.3 Door adjustment”, page 99
1.1 Rear door - Summary of components
1 - Door
page 97 .
❑ Setting
ment”, page 99 .
tions
❑ 40 Nm.
3 - Door hinge
❑ The top part is connec‐
ted to the bottom part of
- 4 -.
4 - Screw
❑ This screw must be un‐
screwed in order to re‐
move the door from the
hinge.
❑ 23 Nm.
tions
❑ Installed from the inside
of the vehicle.
❑ Remove bottom trim
panel of B pillar.
❑ 25 Nm.
6 - Door hinge
❑ The bottom part is con‐
nected to the top part of
- 4 -.
❑ 25 Nm
8 - Screw
❑ 30 Nm.
❑ This screw must be unscrewed in order to remove the door.
96 Rep. gr.58 - Rear doors, door components

9 - Door retaining strap

10 - Screw
❑ 9 Nm.
❑ For door retaining strap.
❑ Installed from the inside of the vehicle.
❑ 25 Nm.
12 - Door hinge
❑ The bottom part is connected to the top part of the hinge by the screw - 16 -.
❑ 25 Nm.
❑ 40 Nm.
15 - Door hinge
❑ The top part is connected to the bottom part of the hinge by the screw - 16 -.
16 - Screw
❑ 23 Nm.
❑ This screw must be screwed down in order to remove the door from the hinge bolt.
1.2 Removing and installing the door

Removing
1. Rear door 97
– Press the wedge - T10383/1- between collar - 3 - and catch
- 2 -, arrow - a - .
– Press out upwards the catch - 2 - with the wedge - T10383/1-
arrow - b - and disconnect the plug connection.
– Undo screws - 7 - at the hinges - arrow - e - .
– Remove the screws - 4 - for the door retaining strap - 5 -.
– Move door retaining strap - 6 - in direction of arrow - d - towards
the inside.
– Lever door - 1 - out of hinges in direction of arrow - f -.
Install


– Observe the gap sizes of the front door ⇒ Body Repairs; Rep.
1.3 Door adjustment
Note
♦ The vehicle must be standing on its wheels in order to adjust

the rear door.
♦ The rear door is correctly adjusted if in the closed state it has
an overall even gap size, is not positioned too far inwards or
outwards and the contours are aligned.
♦ Observe the gap sizes of the front door ⇒ Body Repairs; Rep.
♦ After carrying out removal and installation or adjustment work,
perform corrosion protection measures at the screws and
hinges.
1. Rear door 99

In order to correctly set the gap sizes, the screws
-2, 5, 7, and 8- must be slackened at the A pillar.
– The bottom B pillar trim panel must be removed for the screw
-5-.
⇒ “3.5 Removing and installing bottom B-pillar trim panel”,
page 409 .
– The bottom B pillar trim panel must be unless
removed forbythe
authorised ŠKODAscrew
AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
-7-.
page 409 .
Setting the gap sizes:
Slacken the screws -3 and 9- for correctly setting the flushness.
Note
Other measures, such as aligning the doors towards the top are ineffective. The door will drop again at the
following overpressures.
Adjusting the locking clamp


Note
♦ The arc outside the threaded plate must be firmly welded to the pillar.
♦ In order to adjust the locking clamp -2- once the screws -3- are loosened, increased force must be applied.
♦ The adjustment is carried out only for the right door. The same applies for adjusting the left door.
♦ When closing the door it must lock completely without using additional force and must have no play.
♦ When adjusting the locking clamp, the door must not be pressed upwards or downwards.
The locking clamp is used for adjusting the following:

• If the rear door adjustment is not flush with the side part.
1. Rear door 101


– Slacken the locking clamp -1- by loosening the screws -2- at
the C pillar.
– Adjust the door with the locking clamp -1- in such a way that
the rear door when in the closed state is flush with the side
part (wind noise).
– Tighten screws - 2 - of locking clamp - 1 -.
Tightening torque of screws (Pos. 2) - 25 Nm.

2 Door internal parts

⇒ “2.1 Summary of components”, page 103
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing the cover”, page 104
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing the door retaining strap”,
page 107
⇒ “2.5 Door handle and door lock - Summary of components ”,
page 108
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing the cap”, page 109
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing the door handle”, page 110
⇒ “2.8 Removing and installing the door lock”, page 112
⇒ “2.9 Removing and installing bearing bracket”, page 114
⇒ “2.10 Rear door window - Summary of components”,
page 117
⇒ “2.11 Removing and installing door window”, page 117
⇒ “2.12 Removing and installing window lifter motor”, page 121
⇒ “2.13 Removing and installing the manual
unlessdrive”,
authorisedpage 123AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
by ŠKODA
⇒ “2.14 Removing and installing window crank”, page 124
⇒ “2.15 Remove and install window lifter”, page 124
⇒ “2.16 Removing and installing the window run”, page 126
⇒ “2.17 Removing window run - Combi”, page 130
⇒ “2.18 Removing and installing the outer trim panel on the C pillar
(Combi)”, page 133
⇒ “2.19 Removing and installing the rear fixed door window”, page
134
⇒ “2.20 Removing and installing the fixed door window (Octavia
III - Combi)”, page 135
⇒ “2.21 Removing and installing the inner window channel strip”,
page 136
⇒ “2.22 Removing and installing the outer window channel strip”,
page 137
⇒ “2.23 Removing and installing the outer window channel strip
(Octavia III - Combi)”, page 138
⇒ “2.24 Removing and installing the inside door seal”,
page 139
⇒ “2.25 Removing and installing the outside door seal”,
page 140

1 - Door
page 97 .
❑ Setting
ment”, page 99 .
2 - Inner window channel strip
installing the inner win‐
page 136 .
3 - Door gap seal
4 - Riveted nuts
5 - Cap
stalling bearing brack‐
et”, page 114 .
6 - Cover
stalling the cover”, page
104 .
7 - Outside door seal
installing the outside
door seal”, page 140 .
8 - Fixed glass with outer seal
⇒ “2.19 Removing and installing the rear fixed door window”, page 134 .
9 - Window run
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.16 Removing and installing the window run”, page 126 .
2.2 Removing and installing the cover

Removing

– Removing door trim panel

⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing the rear door trim panel ”, page
400 .
– Lift off the cover -3- in the bottom area.
– Pull the cover - 3 - downwards and remove it from the door
- 4 - in -direction of arrow-.
Note with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
♦ If the following operations are necessary, pull the Bowden cable - 1 - with the grommet - 2 - out of the cover
- 3 -.
♦ The cables are slackened in the holder - 5 -.
Install

– Pull the Bowden cable - 1 - through the cover - 3 - and secure

the grommet - 2 -.
– Insert the cover - 5 - upwards into the door - 4 -.
– Press the cover at the bottom in the door.
Note
The cables are secured in the holders - 5 -.

2.3 Removing and installing the door retaining strap
Removing
400 .
– Unscrew screw - 2 - at the B-pillar.
– Remove the plastic door cover above the loudspeaker and re‐
move the door retaining strap - 1 -.
Install
– Insert the door retaining strap -1- through the opening for the
door cover.
– Fit plastic door cover above the loudspeaker.

– Install door trim panel

400 .
2.4 Removing and installing the locking

clamp
Removing
– Release screws - 2 - and remove locking clamp - 1 -.
Install
– Fit the locking clamp - 1 - at the D pillar and position the screws
- 2 -. Tightening torque: 25 Nm.
– Adjusting the locking clamp
2.5 Door handle and door lock - Summary of components
1 - Bearing bracket
stalling the locking
clamp”, page 108 .
2 - Washer
3 - Cap
stalling the cap”,
page 109 .
4 - Door handle
stalling the door han‐
dle”, page 110 .
5 - Screw
1.7 Nm.
❑ The bearing bracket is
released from the door
by loosening the screw.
6 - Control cable
❑ From door lock to bear‐
ing bracket.
7 - Door lock
stalling the door lock”,
page 112 .
8 - Screw
20 Nm.
9 - Cap
10 - Cover for grip reinforcement
11 - Cap

2.6 Removing and installing the cap

Removing
– Remove the plugs -3- from the rear openings.

– Guide the assembly tool - T10389- by approx. 38 mm into the
opening behind the lock hooks -2- of the bearing bracket.
– Pull the assembly tool - T10389- as far towards the rear
-arrow-, until the hook unlocks.
– Detach the door handle from the door.
– Pull the cap -1- out of the bearing bracket.
Install
– Detach the door handle -2- from the door.
– Push the cap -1- into the bearing bracket.

– For example guide a screwdriver -4- at the lock hooks -3- of

the bearing bracket.
– Press the cap -1- on the door.
– Press in the screwdriver -arrow- until the hook locks.
– Attach plug - 5 -.
2.7 Removing and installing the door handle

Removing

– Remove the cap

⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing the cap”, page 109 .
– Pull the door handle - 1 - slightly towards the rear arrow - a -
out of the support of the bearing bracket.
– Swivel the door handle in direction of arrow - b -.
– Remove the door handle at a right angle arrow - c - out of the
bearing bracket.
Install

– Insert the door handle - 1 - at a right angle arrow - a - into the

bearing bracket.
– Swivel the door handle - 1 - into the door arrow - b -.
– Forcefully press the door handle forwards arrow - c -into the
support of the bearing bracket.
Install the cap
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing the cap”, page 109 .
2.8 Removing and installing the door lock

Removing

– Remove rear door trim panel

400 .
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing the cover”, page 104 .
– Unscrew screws - 4 -.
– Remove the lock - 1 - from the door - 2 -.
Slacken Bowden cable to bearing bracket
– Twist the Bowden cable - 5 - by 45° and remove it from the
bracket - a -.
– Turn the Bowden cable - b - until it can be guided out of the
lug in the door lock (Pos. 1) arrow - c -.
Slacken the Bowden cable to the inner door control:
– Twist the Bowden cable -6- by 45° and remove it from the
bracket.
– Turn the Bowden cable - d - until the Bowden cable can be
guided out of the lug in the door lock (Pos. 1) arrow - e -.
Install


– Tightening torque of screw (Pos. 4) - 18 Nm.
It is absolutely necessary to perform a functional check because
the door cannot be opened if the adjustment of the Bowden cables
is not accurate and if they are not correctly locked.
2.9 Removing and installing bearing bracket

Removing


400 .
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing the cover”, page 104 .
– Removing the door handle
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing the door handle”, page 110 .
– Release screw - 4 - and remove gasket - 3 -.
–Protected
Remove bearing
by copyright. bracket
Copying for private -or1commercial
- from the door
purposes, arrow
in part - a -.is not permitted
or in whole,
Slacken Bowden cable
– Unlock the bracket - 5 - and swivel out the mount out of the
support in the bearing bracket arrow - b -.
– Lift the bolt of the control cable out of the support - c -.
– Remove the Bowden cable from the bearing bracket arrow
-d-.
Install


– Install screws - 4 -, tightening torque: 1.7 Nm.

2.10 Rear door window - Summary of components
1 - Door
2 - Door window
installing door window”,
page 117 .
3 - Window run
❑ Inserted in the flange.
installing the window
run”, page 126 .
4 - Fixed door window
installing the rear fixed
door window”,
page 134 .
5 - Adjusting pin and straddling
dowel
❑ For securing the door
window.
6 - Screw
8 Nm.
7 - Nut
7 Nm.
8 - Adhesive pad
9 - Window lifter
installing window lifter motor”, page 121 .
10 - Washer
11 - Window lifter motor
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.12 Removing and installing window lifter motor”, page 121 .
12 - Manuel drive
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.13 Removing and installing the manual drive”, page 123 .
13 - Screw
14 - Window crank
❑ For manual operation.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.14 Removing and installing window crank”, page 124 .
2.11 Removing and installing door window

Removing


400 . by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Protected
– Remove inside
with respect door seal
strip”, page 136 .
– Release cap - 5 -.
– Lower the door window - 6 - until the straddle pin - 4 - and the
straddling dowel - 3 - can be reached in the window lifter
opening - 2 -.
Note
If this operation cannot be performed due to a failure at the window lifter motor, remove the window lifter motor
- 7 -. Then the door window can be pushed to the required working height.
– Screw a 5 mm screw (approx. 70 mm long) into the adjusting

pin - 4 - and pull the adjusting pin from the straddling dowel
- 3 -.
– Screw an 8 mm screw (approx. 80 mm long) into the straddling
dowel -3- and pull out of the pane.

Note
Do not use excessive force when screwing the screw into the straddling dowel as it may fall into the door.
– Withdraw the straddling dowel -3- from the window lifter guide
-1- and hence from the door window.
Note
Hold the door window when pulling out the straddling dowel so that the door does not fall down and get dam‐
aged.
– Pull the rear part of the window run -2- out of the supports.
– Pull the door window -1- upwards at an angle -arrows- towards
the outside of the vehicle and out of the window channel.

Install
Note
Before inserting the straddling dowel - 3 - and the straddle pin

- 4 -, check the door window - 1 - for damage.
– Take the mean of the centre straddling dowel - 3 - and insert

it when the door window is removed - 1 -.
– Press the straddle pin - 4 - into the straddling dowel - 3 -.
– Guide the pane - 1 - into the door - 2 - insert arrows - a - and
into the window lifter guide - 5 -.
– Gently tap on the pane - 1 - to lock it from above into the win‐
dow lifter - 5 -.
– It must be pressed until the catch locks audibly into place.
removal.

2.12 Removing and installing window lifter

motor
Removing
– Remove inner lining of the door panel.

slide off.
– Remove the window lifter motor with the control unit - 1 - from
the supports of the hoisting drum - 3 -.
Install
Note
On a newly installed window lifter motor (door control unit), the
auxiliary functions and the closing force limitation must be coded!

– Fit the window lifter motor - 1 - on the supports of the hoisting

drum - 3 -. Raise the door window slightly and then lower it so
that the serration can slide in better between the motor and
the hoisting drum.
– Secure the plug connections - 4 -.
– The new window lifter motor is coded.
– After the coding, the window lifter motor can be automatically
raised up to the stop. Then pull the switch once more for 2
seconds. The window lifter motor can detect its upper stop
through this.
– The further work procedure occurs in the reversewithorder
respect to the
removal.

2.13 Removing and installing the manual drive
Removing
– Remove window crank
⇒ “2.14 Removing and installing window crank”, page 124 .
400 .
slide off.
– Remove the manual drive - 1 - from the supports of the hoisting
drum - 3 -.
Install
– Fit the manual drive - 1 - on the supports of the hoisting drum
- 3 -. Raise the door window slightly and then lower it so that
the serration can slide in better between the manual drive and
the hoisting drum.


removal.
2.14 Removing and installing window crank

Removing
– Press circlip - 2 - together arrows - a - .

– Pull the circlip - 2 - a little from below the window crank (Pos.
1) arrow - b -.
– Undo window crank - 1 - arrow - c - .
Install
– Insert circlip - 2 -.
– Press on window crank - 1 -.
2.15 Remove and install window lifter

Removing


400 .
– Remove the window lifter motor
⇒ “2.12 Removing and installing window lifter motor”,
page 121 or the manual drive
⇒ “2.13 Removing and installing the manual drive”,
page 123 .
– Unlock the catches - 4 - on the hoisting drum - 3 - and move
into the door arrows - a - .
– Slide the window lifter - 1 - into the door.
– Move the window lifter to the door cutout arrow - b - and take
it out arrow - c - .
Install

– Slide window lifter - 1 - through the door cutout arrow - a -.

– Put the window lifter in its fitting position - b -.
– Push the window lifter thread through the door and tighten the
nuts - 2 - (6 Nm).
– Press the hoisting drum through the door openings arrows
- c - until the catches lock into position.
2.16 Removing and installing the window run
Note
Do not bend the window run when removing!
Removing
400 .


– Remove the window run in the column compartment and un‐
screw the screws - 2 - on the cover - 1 - (2.5 Nm).
– Remove cover.
– Remove seal with window run - 1 - out of the window frame
arrows - a - .

– Remove the window run seal - 1 - in -direction of arrow b - from

the mounts in the door.
Install
– Door windowed has been lowered to the lower position.

– Slide the window run - 1 - into the supports arrows - a - .

– Press the window run - 1 - evenly all around against the door
flange - 2 -.
– Press the sealing lip of the door run from the inside against the
door flange.
– Remove window run in column compartment.

– Install column trim - 1 - and install screws - 2 - (2.5 Nm).
2.17 Removing window run - Combi

Removing
400 .
– Remove outer window channel strip
⇒ “2.23 Removing and installing the outer window channel
strip (Octavia III - Combi)”, page 138 .
– Remove the window run in the column compartment and un‐
screw the screws - 2 - on the cover - 1 - (2.5 Nm).
130
Rep. gr.58 - Rear doors, door components
– Remove cover.
– Window run with seal is removed with the fixed glass pane at
the same time.
– Unlock the rear fixed door window
⇒ “2.20 Removing and installing the fixed door window (Oc‐
tavia III - Combi)”, page 135 .
– Push out window run seal from the door web in direction of
arrow - a -.
– Remove seal - 1 - in -direction of arrow b - with window run
from the mounts in the door.

– Remove seal - 1 - with window run and fixed door window

- 2 - upwards out of the door in direction of arrow - a -.

Install
2.18 Removing and installing the outer trim

panel on the C pillar (Combi)
Removing

– Partially remove the window guide seal in screw positions

- 3 - from the inside of the door.
– Remove screws -3- (2 Nm).
– Partially slide out the outer window channel strip.
– Remove the outer C pillar trim - 2 - from the window run.
2.19 Removing and installing the rear fixed

door window
♦ Release tool - T30116-
Removing
– Removing the window run
⇒ “2.16 Removing and installing the window run”, page 126 .
– Mask off the protective foil from the bolt hole -2-.

– Remove screw -2- (6 Nm).

– Slide the seal on the inside of the fixed door window below the
leg of the door frame so that the tool T30116 - 3 - can be in‐
serted on the provided point.
– Insert the tool T30116 - 3 - between the pane and the door
frame towards the unlocking bolt (in position as shown in the
illustration).
– Unlock the fixed pane - 1 - from the vehicle outwards by gently
lifting it out using tool T30116.
– Detach the fixed pane - 1 - with the seal on the outer pane
slightly after releasing from the door frame.
Install
– Slide fixed pane with the seal on the outer pane into the door
frame.
– Clip in the securing bolts into the opening in the door frame.
– Push the seal of the fixed pane over the door frame and cor‐
rectly insert the pane.
– Stick protective foil over bolt hole - 2 -.
removal.
Note
The securing bolts is a component part of the fixed pane. In case

of damage, the fixed pane must be completely replaced.
2.20 Removing and installing the fixed door

window (Octavia IIIAUTO
- Combi)
unless authorised by ŠKODA A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
Removing
– Removing the window run
⇒ “2.16 Removing and installing the window run”, page 126 .
– Mask off the protective foil from the bolt hole -2-.

– Slide the seal on the inside of the fixed door window below the
leg of the door frame so that the tool T30116 - 3 - can be in‐
serted on the provided point.
– Insert the tool T30116 - 3 - between the pane and the door
frame towards the unlocking bolt (in position as shown in the
illustration).
– Unlock the fixed pane - 1 - from the vehicle outwards by gently
lifting it out using tool T30116.
– Detach the fixed pane - 1 - with the seal on the outer pane
slightly after releasing from the door frame.
Install
– Slide fixed pane with the seal on the outer pane into the door
frame.
– Clip in the securing bolts into the opening in the door frame.
– Push the seal of the fixed pane over the door frame and cor‐
rectly insert the pane.
– Stick protective foil over bolt hole - 2 -.
removal.
Note
The securing bolts is a component part of the fixed pane. In case

of damage, the fixed pane must be completely replaced.
2.21 Removing and installing the inner win‐

dow channel strip
Removing


400 .
– Detach window channel strip - 1 - evenly - arrows - from the
flange - 2 -.
Install
– Press the window channel strip - 1 - by hand evenly onto the
flange - 2 -.

dow channel strip
Note
The window channel strip unless
is part of theby fixed
authorised ŠKODAwindow
AUTO A. S.andŠKODA isAUTO
re‐ A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
moved when the window is removed
⇒ “2.19 Removing and installing the rear fixed door window”, page
134 .


dow channel strip (Octavia III - Combi)
Note
♦ The core of the outer window channel strip consists of a metal

insert.
♦ If the core is bent, the seal can no longer be straightened. It
remains “warped”.
♦ Therefore the seal must be removed uniformly and without
bending it.
Removing
– Remove seal evenly in direction of arrow - a - upwards out of
the door flange - 2 -.
Install
– Mount the outer window channel strip onto the door flange and
press it on evenly.
138 with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
Rep. gr.58 - Rear doors, door components
Note
Do not use any impact tools!
2.24 Removing and installing the inside door

seal
During the installation in series, the inside door seals are provided
with a sealing compound which is placed on the door flange and
subsequently rolled up.
Note
♦ During the removal of the seal, the sealing mass is distributed

on the inside of the seal. While doing so, the sides are slightly
bent open. If the seal is re-installed, leak-tightness and tight fit
can no longer be guaranteed.
♦
♦ Removing and installing is only carried out for the right inside
door seal. The same applies therefore when removing and in‐
stalling the left inside door seal.

Removing
– Remove trim panels of pillars
⇒ “3 Trim panels of pillars”, page 404 .
– Detach the inside door seal - 1 - from the body flange - 2 -.
Install unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– When installing the inside door seal, start in the top radius of
the door cutout arrows - b -.
– Sealant groove at position arrows - a - .
2.25 Removing and installing the outside

door seal
Note
Check the clips - 2 - for damage, if necessary replace them.

Removing
– Unclip the clips - 2 - and remove the seal - 1 - from the door
- 3 -.
Install
– Press the seal - 1 - with the clips - 2 - on the door.
Note
TheProtected
seal -by1 copyright.
- mustCopying
rest directly atcommercial
for private or the sealpurposes,
of theinwindow run.is not permitted
part or in whole,

60 – Sunroof
1 Sliding/tilting roof
⇒ “1.1 Summary of components - Sliding/tilting roof”, page 142
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing spoiler”, page 144
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing glass panel for sliding/tilting roof”,
page 147
⇒ “1.4 Adjusting the glass panel for sliding/tilting roof”,
page 149
⇒ “1.5 Replace gasket”, page 150
⇒ “1.6 Summary of components - screen for sliding roof”,
page 152
⇒ “1.7 Removing and installing the sliding roof screen”,
page 153
⇒ “1.8 Removing and installing motor for sliding/tilting roof ”, page
159
⇒ “1.10 Removing and installing cover for sliding/tilting roof”, page
161
⇒ “1.11 Installing and removing the sliding/tilting roof”,
page 166
⇒ “1.12 Installing and removing the frame for the sliding block
guide”, page 170
⇒ “1.13 Removing and installing water drain hoses”, page 171
⇒ “1.14 Cleaning the water drain hoses”, page 172
Note
To ensure the sliding/tilting roof works correctly after removing

and reinstalling the motor, adjustment is required.
1.1 Summary of components - Sliding/tilting roof
142 Rep. gr.60 - Sunroof

1 - Sliding/tilting roof frame

installing cover for slid‐
ing/tilting roof”,
page 161 .
2 - Spoiler
stalling spoiler”,
page 144 .
3 - Gasket
⇒ “1.5 Replace gasket”,
page 150 .
4 - Front cover
installing cover for slid‐
ing/tilting roof”,
page 161 .
5 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
6 - Cover
7 - Screw Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
❑ 2 Nm unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
8 - Screw
❑ 3 Nm
9 - Engine ( control unit for slid‐
ing roof - J245- )
Note
After replacing the control unit for

the sliding roof - J245- the coding
must be carried out via Guided
Functions in the Targeted fault find‐
ing ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “1.8 Removing and installing motor for sliding/tilting roof ”, page 159 .
10 - Water drain hose
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “1.13 Removing and installing water drain hoses”, page 171 .
11 - Screw
❑ 3 Nm
12 - Frame for sliding block guide
❑ With sliding block guide and Bowden cables
⇒ “1.12 Installing and removing the frame for the sliding block guide”, page 170 .
13 - Wiring loom
14 - Screw
❑ 3.5 Nm
• observe the order of tightening up
• Tighten the front screws first on the right then on the left.
1. Sliding/tilting roof 143

• Tighten the rear screws first on the right then on the left.
Summary of components, glass cover, spoiler
1 - Spoiler
stalling spoiler”,
page 144 .
2 - Spring
❑ During installation, in‐
sert spring into the hold‐
er towards the rear.
3 - Screw
❑ 1.5 Nm
4 - Screw
❑ 5.5 Nm
5 - Glass for sliding roof
stalling glass panel for
sliding/tilting roof”,
page 147 .
6 - Screw
❑ 5.5 Nm
1.2 Removing and installing spoiler

Removing
– Open up the sliding roof unless
in full.

– Press the spoiler - 1 - down and take out the profile seal - 2 -
from the mount at the edges.
– Push the spoiler downwards and take out the profile seal
- 1 - upwards out of the catches out of the mount.
– Remove the screws from the mounting left and right.

– Lift out the spoiler from the bracket towards the front and lift it
upwards.
Install
– Place the spring - 1 - into the spoiler.

– Push the spoiler with spring - 1 - into the holder moving it to‐
wards the rear.
– Tighten screws - 2 - to the tightening torque

⇒ Item 3 (page 144) .
– Align the centric-formed seal - 1 - and allow it to rest against

the stop - arrow -.
Note
The profile seal must rest against the stop otherwise it will warp
when pressed into the securing frame.
– Press the profile seal - 1 - into the securing frame - 2 -.
Note
Press the profile seal evenly and completely into the securing
frame to prevent warping.

– Press the profile seal - 1 - with the assembly lever into the
locking lugs - arrows - on the securing frame - 2 -.
Caution
Do not use a screwdriver to press in the profile seal to avoid

damaging the meshing.
1.3 Removing and installing glass panel for

sliding/tilting roof
Removing
– Open the glass panel approx. 150 mm towards the rear.
– Undo the screws on the rear of the glass cover on the left and
right - arrow -.
Caution
Cover the opening between the A-pillar and sunroof frame in

a suitable way (with a cloth or paper, etc.) to prevent the screws
from falling into
unlessthe vehicle.

– Undo the front screws - arrow - from the glass cover on the left
and right.
– Only slacken the screws in the middle of the glass cover

- arrow -.
– Together with a secondunless
mechanic, lift out the glass cover from
the sliding block guide.
Note
Close the mechanical system using the button to avoid damage

to the sliding blocks after removal of the glass cover.
Retract the sliding blocks - 1 - into the position » Roof closed «.

Install

– Open the sliding blocks approx. 150 mm towards the rear.

– Together with a second mechanic, insert the glass cover into
the sliding block guide.
– Insert the glass cover frame with recess - arrow - over the
slackened screws.
Note
Note assembly sequence of screws.
– First tighten the screws at the rear and at the front, and then
in the middle.
– Close the sliding roof and check its position vis-a-vis the roof.
– Open and adjust the glass cover if required.
– Tighten the screws to the prescribed tightening torque.
1.4 Adjusting the glass panel for sliding/tilt‐

ing roof
Note
Carry out a height adjustment for the glass cover using the rear
edge alone.
– Tilt the glass cover - 1 - and undo the screws - 2 - on the rear
edge.
– Undo the middle screws on the glass cover.

– Carry out a height adjustment of the glass cover -arrow -

⇒ page 150 .
– Tighten the screws on the rear edge of the glass cover to the
specified tightening torque.
– Close the sliding/tilting roof and tighten the middle screws to
the specified tightening torque.
Note
♦ To achieve the best possible appearance, it is important to

make sure that the left and right adjustment is performed as
evenly as possible (symmetrically).
♦ The glass panel must at no point be higher at the front or lower
at the rear than the roof.
Tightening torques
– ⇒ “1.1 Summary of components - Sliding/tilting roof”,
page 142 .
Height adjustment of the glass panel for the sliding/tilting roof

Front adjustment unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Dimension a = 1 mm
Rear adjustment
– Dimension b = 0.5 mm
1.5 Replace gasket

Remove top seal:
– Glass cover has been removed.
1- Top seal.

– Lift out the seal from the sealing channel upwards all the way
around.
Install top seal:
Place the seal in the sealing channel with the sealing lip facing
out.
– Centre the seal with the butt joint - arrow - rear in the middle
of the vehicle and press into the sealing channel.
– Press the seal into the sealing channel all the way round.
Caution
The seal must not be stretched otherwise it cannot be pressed

into the sealing channel completely.
Replacing the glass roof pane seal

– Open sliding/tilting roof.

– Remove the rear glass cover seal from the sealing channel.
Install
Note
To make installation of the seal easier, you can coat it with a soapy
solution.
– Insert the seal - 1 - on both sides flush to the glass.
– Press the seal into the sealing channel as shown.
– Press the seal towards the middle into the sealing channel on
both sides.
1.6 Summary of components - screen for sliding roof

1 - Sliding block upper part

2 - Spring
❑ Only fitted on the right-
hand side.
3 - Control cable
❑ not available as spare
part.
4 - Screen for sliding roof
stalling the sliding roof
screen”, page 153 .
5 - Centring
part.
6 - Stop
❑ Move into the centring
from the top.
7 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
8 - Corrugated pipe
part.
9 - Screw
❑ 1 Nm
10 - Profile seal
part.
– First insert to the side in
the loop
Protected in the Copying
by copyright. roller for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
blind
unless material
authorised and AUTO
by ŠKODA thenA. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
together into the diagonal tie.
11 - Door handle
12 - Diagonal ties
❑ Can be removed without removing the roller blind for the sunroof.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “1.7 Removing and installing the sliding roof screen”, page 153 .
13 - Bushing
❑ Only fitted on the right-hand side.
14 - Sliding block lower part
❑ Welded with linkage.
1.7 Removing and installing the sliding roof

screen
Remove linkage
– Open glass panel.
– Move roller blind a little halfway.

Caution
Raise the lower part of the sliding block from the bottom part
but without too much force- risk of breaking.
– Insert plastic wedge into the recess - arrow - and carefully

move the upper part of the sliding block from the catch on the
bottom part of the sliding block- at the same time, move the
upper part of the sliding block towards the rear.
– Remove the two upper parts of the sliding block - 2 - out of the
diagonal tie - 1 - to one side.
– Remove diagonal tie - 2 - out of the roller blind for the sunroof
- 1 - to one side.
Remove screen for sliding roof

– Glass cover removed.
– Unscrew the screws - 1 - from the rear cover - 2 -.

– Raise rear cover -1- in direction of arrow.

– Move sliding blocks in position “Roof closed”.
– Remove screws - 1 - on the roller blind for the sunroof - 2 - at

the rear on both sides.
– Lift the screen for sliding roof - 1 -, at an angle to the rear as

shown in the image, and push the diagonal tie with the sliding
blocks towardsProtected
the rear in direction
by copyright. Copying of the arrow
for private out of
or commercial the in part or in whole, is not permitted
purposes,
guide. unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Pry roller blind for the sunroof - 1 -.

Installing roller blind for the sunroof

1 - Sliding block lower part
Note
Lower part of sliding block is welded

with linkage.
❑ Lower part of sliding
block must be inserted
with the linkage into the
guide as shown in the
figure.
2 - Sliding block upper part
❑ Inserted into the lower
part of the sliding block
⇒ page 158 .
3 - Diagonal ties
4 - Profile seal
5 - Control cable
part.
6 - Guide
7 - Corrugated pipe
part.
8 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
9 - Centring
part. Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
❑ Inserted into the guide with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
⇒ page 157 .
10 - Stop
– Inserted into the centring
– Insert bottom part of sliding block into the runner - arrow -.

– Guide lugs -arrow- must rest against the guide as shown.
– The bottom part of the sliding block - 2 - must be inserted into

the runner - 3 - as shown in the figure.
– Insert the upper parts of the sliding block - 1 - with diagonal tie
to the bottom part of the sliding block - 2 - from the top.
– Insert centring - 2 - with guide bolts - arrow - flush into guide

- 1 - of the sliding roof frame.
– The centring of the screen for sliding roof must be slid into the
runner -arrow- above on both sides.

– And -2- below according to the Fig.

– The runners of the centering must be guided correctly in the
runner - arrow -.
– Tighten the screws -1- to the specified tightening torque.

– Installing the diagonal tie ⇒ page 158 .
Installing the diagonal tie

– Roller blind for the sunroof is installed ⇒ page 155 .
– Carefully insert the profile seal - 2 - inserted into the loop out
of the cloth of the roller blind - 1 - into the profile seal channel
of the diagonal tie.
– Insert the with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
upper parts of the sliding block -2- into the diagonal tie -1- on
both sides.
– Insert the upper part of the sliding block - 3 - from the insider
towards the front in direction of arrow into the bottom part of
the sliding block until it latches - arrow -.
Removing and installing recessed handle
– Open glass panel.

– Remove screws - 2 - and recessed handle - 1 -.

– Check proper running after installing.
– Tighten the screws to the prescribed tightening torque - 1 Nm.
1.8 Removing and installing motor for slid‐

ing/tilting roof
Note
♦ If you need to remove the faulty motor while the sliding roof is
closed, the moulded headliner in the region of the screws
⇒ Item 6 (page 144) in the rear edge of the cover must be
lowered and the glass cover must be removed.
♦ To ensure the sliding/tilting roof works correctly after removing
and reinstalling the motor or replacing the motor, adjustment
is required.
Removing
– Glass panel removed
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing glass panel for sliding/tilting
roof”, page 147 .
– Remove screws - 1 - and remove rear cover - 2 -.
– Disconnect the electrical plug connector from the motor.

– Unscrew the screws on the motor and remove the motor up‐
wards.
Install
Note
♦ After replacing the glass cover, an engine, or folding mecha‐

nism, carry out an initial run procedure with the ⇒ Vehicle
diagnostic tester or with a mechanical procedure, see below.
♦ During the initial run procedure, the closing force limiter is
switched off.
Note
During removal of the motor, the locking clip -1- may become
loose. You will need to place it back into the correct position.
– Before installing the motor, place the locking clip into the cor‐
rect position of the frame by pressing it in completely.
– Insert engine and tighten the screws to the prescribed tight‐
ening torque - 3 Nm.
1.9 Teach sliding sunroof control unit
Note
♦ After replacing the glass cover, an engine, or folding mechanism, carry out an initial run procedure with the
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic
Protected tester
by copyright. Copyingor
forwith
privateaormechanical procedure,
commercial purposes, see isbelow.
in part or in whole, not permitted
♦ During the
withinitial
respect run
to the procedure, the closing
correctness of information force limiter
in this document. Copyrightis
by switched
ŠKODA AUTOoff.
A. S.�

Standard run procedure of sliding roof motor

Ignition switched on, roof closed, rotary switch in home position.
– Hold folded-out switch for sunroof - arrow B - and keep in this
position for the entire initial run procedure (approx. 20 s).
– During the teach run, the glass cover opens up and is then
closed fully.
– After the glass cover is in the closed final position again, the
initial run procedure ends and the button can be released.
1.10 Removing and installing cover for slid‐

ing/tilting roof
♦ Power knife, e.g. - V.A.G 1561A -
♦ Saw blade Ø 80 mm - e.g. - V.A.G 1561/26 -

♦ Cutting knife, L shaped, length 25.4 mm - e.g. - V.A.G 1561/22

-
♦ Manual cartridge gun, e.g. - V.A.G 1628 -
Materials
♦ Cleaning solution - D 009 401 04 -
♦ Glass/paint primer - D 009 200 02-
♦ Assembly glue - D 190 MKD A3-
Removing
Note
It cannot be removed without being destroyed!

Caution
Tape over the surfaces of the body around the sliding/tilting

roof with adhesive tape to protect the paintwork.

– At a distance - a - = 10 mm from the inner edge, mark the

separation cut along the entire length of the cover.

– Mark the separation cuts at a distance - b - = 10 mm from the

front edge and at a distance - c - = 10 mm from the rear edge.
Caution
Set the depth stop to a depth of 5 mm, due to the small space
between front cover and frame.
– Using the power knife - V.A.G 1561A- and saw blade, Ø 80mm
- V.A.G 1561/26- separate the cover from the rear edge to‐
wards the front in the marked separation cut position.
– In the marked position, separate the cover on the front edge
and the rear edge cross-ways.
– Remove the removed material to make the glue beads acces‐
sible.
– Using the electric knife - V.A.G 1561A- and cutting knife, L -
shaped, length 25.4 mm - V.A.G 1561/22- cut through the glue
beads from back to front on both sides.
– Also cut through the glue beads on the front cover.
– Cut through the glue beads on the middle of the cover with
cutting wire and two handles. Remove the rest of the cover.
Install
Caution
♦ Clean the adhesive surfaces of dirt and grease.

♦ Cut back old glue residues on the adhesive surface to the
required extent just prior to glueing the new sliding roof.
♦ Do not prime the adhesive surface and do not treat with
cleaning solution.
Note
♦ Carry out the installation while the sliding/tilting roof is closed.

♦ The position of the glue beads is shown on the cover press
part of the sliding roof.
– Do not cut back the remaining glue bead on the sliding/tilting

roof until just prior to installation.
Caution
Gently sand the adhesive surface with very fine sandpaper.
– Clean the region around the glue bead with a cleaning solution
- D 009 401 04 - .

– Prime the glue bead - arrows - with glass/paint primer - D 009

200 02 - and allow to dry off.
– Apply the assembly glue - D 190 MKD A3 - - arrows -to the
specified location.
– No adhesive may be applied to the cover left or right of length

- a - = 10 cm.
Dimensions for applying the glue

1- Adhesive
2- Glass/paint primer
3- Cover for Sliding/tilting roof
• Dimension -a- = 8 mm
• Dimension -b- = 12 mm
• Dimension - c - = shown on the cover press part
– Insert the cover into the sliding/tilting roof cutout, press to‐
wards the glass of the sliding/tilting roof and secure with
adhesive tape.
Installation position, front cover

1 - Glass cover
2 - Front cover glass cover
♦ Dimension a = 2 mm ±
1 mm
♦ Dimension b = 0 + 0.5 mm
rear cover to roof plane
♦ Dimension c = 1.5 mm ±
0.5 mm
♦ Dimension d = 3 mm ±
0.5 mm
❑ Press the front cover in‐
to the plane with the
glass cover towards the
dimensions.
3 - Roof
4 - Frame for side wall (side
part)
5 - Windscreen
Minimum hardening time
WARNING
♦ To install the cover, only use one of the assembly glues

listed below.
♦ This glue is adjusted on account of its elasticity and does
not cause cracking in the painted cover after hardening.
♦ The vehicle is only safe for use after the minimum hard‐
ening time has expired.
Seal adhesive kit Minimum hard‐

ening time in
hours.
Cover for Sliding/tilting Assembly glue - D 190 3
roof MKD A3 -
1.11 Installing and removing the sliding/tilting

roof

♦ Power knife, e.g. - V.A.G 1561A -
♦ Cutting knife, L shaped, 25.4 mm - e.g. - V.A.G 1561/22 -
♦ Double cartridge gun - e.g. - VAS 5237-
Materials
♦ 2K - window pane adhesive kit - DA 004 600 A2 - 1)
♦ 1K - window pane adhesive - DH 009 100 03 - 3)
1) Observe minimum hardening time ⇒ page 170 .

2) To work this material use a double cartridge gun - VAS 5237 - .
3) Small cartridge 110.
Removing
– Glass cover has been removed.
– Front trim panel has been removed.
– Disconnect all electrical connections for the sliding/tilting roof.

– Remove the moulded headliner

⇒ “10 Moulded headliner”, page 439 .
– To remove, cut through the adhesive join - 1 - between the

frame for the sliding roof - 2 - and the body.
– Cut through the bonding point between the body and the frame
using an electric knife - V.A.G 1561A - and cutting knife, L-
shaped, 25.4 mm - V.A.G 1561/22 - towards the front.
– Cut through the bonding point between the windscreen and

body as shown.
– Cut through the bonding point on the rear side of the sliding
roof as well.

– Cut through the glue bead between the frame for the sliding
roof and the body from the inside of the vehicle as shown in
the figure.
Install
– Remove the glass cover before applying the glue.
– The frame for the front sliding/tilting roof is centralised with the
glass cover.
– Carry out the centering at the rear with the centering pin in the
middle of the vehicle roof ⇒ page 170 .
– Clean the bonding surface with cleaning solution - D 009 401
04 - .
– Apply the glass/paint primer - D 009 200 02 - described as

follows.
– Begin with felt which has been fully absorbed.
– Apply the glass/paint primer evenly in one stroke with the ap‐
plicator as shown on the roof frame.
• Width of primer coat, approx. 20 mm.
• The glass/paint primer must be applied underneath the entire
glue bead.
• Airing time 10 minutes.
Caution
The frame for the sliding/tilting roof must be inserted within 10

minutes after applying the glue, as otherwise the adhesion of
the glue sealing material may be impaired.

1- Adhesive
2- Glass/paint primer
3- Sliding/tilting roof frame
• Dimension -a- = 8 mm
• Dimension -b- = 12 mm
• Dimension - c - = shown on theauthorised
cover by press
ŠKODApart.
unless AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Set the nozzle - 2 - onto the frame with the entire surface.
• Direction of application - arrow - of the glue bead -1 -.
– Insert the sliding/tilting roof with the applied adhesive - 1 - into
the roof cutout.

– Centralise the
roof frame - 3 - with the centering pin - arrow -
.
– Tighten the screw - 4 - to the specified tightening torque
⇒ “1 Sliding/tilting roof”, page 142 .
WARNING
♦ For safety reasons, only use a non-conducting 2K adhe‐

sive from those given below for the installation.
♦ The vehicle is only safe for use after the minimum hard‐
ening time has expired.
Seal adhesive kit Minimum hard‐

ening time in
hours
Sliding/tilting roof 2K window pane adhe‐ 3
frame sive kit - DA 004 600
A2-
1.12 Installing and removing the frame for the

sliding block guide
Removing
Note
♦ Before removal, mark the fitting position of the frame.

♦ A second mechanic is needed with
to remove the
respect to the frame.of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
correctness
♦ One of the fitters undoes the screw connection while the sec‐
ond one holds the frame and removes it from the vehicle.
– The moulded header has been removed

– The cover for the screen for the sliding roof has been removed
page 153 .
– Mark the fitting position of the frame for the sliding block guide
- 1 - to the frame of the sliding roof.

– First, undo the rear screws - arrow - on the frame.
Caution
When removing, the screws arrow - A - initially remain fitted.
– Remove screws -arrows-.

– Hold the frame - now you can remove the screws arrow - A -.
– Remove the frame through the rear lid.
Install
– When installing, keep to the fitting position based on the mark‐
ings and tighten the screws.
– Tighten the screws alternately from front to rear to the speci‐
fied tightening torque.
1.13 Removing and installing water drain ho‐

ses
– Water drain hose - 1 - .
– Fixing clamp - 2 - (slid onto the rear retaining handle).
– Fixing angle piece - 3 - .
– Fixing clamp - 4 - (attached to side part).
– Drain valve - 5 - (in the opening in the side part) .
Removing
– Lower the moulded headliner
page 439 .
– Remove luggage compartment side trim panel
⇒ “7.4 Removing and installing side luggage compartment trim
panel”, page 428 .
– Remove clips -2 and 4-.
– Remove water drain hose from the bodyshell.
Install
Caution
Make sure that the water drain hose is not squashed!

1.14 Cleaning the water drain hoses
Note
For cleaning, we recommend you use a Bowden cable as an aux‐

iliary tool.
– The cleaning is performed by removing dirt from the drain

valve and by cleaning the water drain hose with a Bowden
cable.

2 Sun roof - Combi

⇒ “2.1 Summary of components - Combi Sun roof”, page 173
⇒ “2.2 Summary of components - screen for sliding roof”,
page 175
⇒ “2.3 Assembly overview - Air deflector”, page 176
⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing the glass roof”, page 176
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing the rear glass panel”, page 180
⇒ “2.6 Adjust the glass cover - check height adjustment”,
page 185
⇒ “2.7 Adjust glass panel at front”, page 186
⇒ “2.8 Adjust the rear glass cover”, page 187
⇒ “2.9 Removing and installing sun roof frame”, page 187
⇒ “2.10 Removing and installing the draft deflector”, page 190
⇒ “2.11 Removing and installing control unit for sunroof ”,
page 194
⇒ “2.12 Removing and installing roof blind control unit ”,
page 196
⇒ “2.13 Close the sliding roof manually”, page 198
⇒ “2.14 Removing and installing outer seal for the sliding roof
frame”, page 199
page 203
⇒ “2.17 Teach sliding sunroof control unit ”, page 208
⇒ “2.18 Teach control unit for screen for sliding roof ”,
page 208
2.1 Summary of components - Combi Sun roof
2. Sun roof - Combi 173

1 - Rear glass panel

stalling the glass roof”,
page 176 .
❑ Setting
⇒ “2.6 Adjust the glass
cover - check height ad‐
justment”, page 185 .
2 - Screw
❑ 7 Nm
3 - Gasket
❑ For rear glass panel.
installing outer seal for
the sliding roof frame”,
page 199 .
4 - Electrical line
5 - Inner seal
❑ Installed on assembly
frame.
6 - Rear section
7 - Control unit for roof blind
installing roof blind con‐
trol unit ”, page 196 .
8 - Screw
❑ For fastening engines.
❑ 8 Nm
9 - Screw
❑ For fastening sunroof frames.
❑ 8 Nm
10 - sunroof frame
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.9
Protected Removing
by copyright. Copyingand installing
for private sun purposes,
or commercial roof frame”,
in part or page
in whole,187
is not .permitted
11 - Control cable with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
❑ For sun blind

12 - Arch support
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.16 Removing and installing the sliding roof screen”, page 203 .
14 - Folding mechanism
❑ For front glass panel, with linkages.
15 - Support clip
16 - Tension spring
17 - Draft deflector
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.10 Removing and installing the draft deflector”, page 190 .
18 - Sliding sunroof control unit
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.11 Removing and installing control unit for sunroof ”, page 194 .

19 - Connectors
20 - Cap
21 - Screw
❑ 7 Nm
22 - Glass cover
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing the glass roof”, page 176 .
❑ Setting ⇒ “2.6 Adjust the glass cover - check height adjustment”, page 185 .
23 - Outer seal
⇒ “2.14 Removing and installing outer seal for the sliding roof frame”, page 199 .
2.2 Summary of components - screen for sliding roof

installing the sliding roof
2 - Support
❑ For the cloth of the blind
of the sun roof.
3 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
4 - Driver
5 - Tension hoop
6 - sunroof frame

2.3 Assembly overview - Air deflector
1 - Draft deflector
installing the draft de‐
flector”, page 190 .
2 - Tension spring
3 - Support clip
2.4 Removing and installing the glass roof

Removing

– Open the glass panel - 2 - until the blind - 1 - is accessible.

– Move the blind - 1 - from the interior towards the rear in the
- direction of the arrow -.
Note
Use a magnetic tool for removing the screws so that the screws do not fall into the mechanism of the sliding
roof.

– Remove gasket - 3 - from body frame.

– Remove the screws - 2 - for glass cover - 1 - left and right.
– Remove the glass cover upwards - arrows - .
Install
Note
♦ Always use new screws when installing the glass cover.

♦ Use a magnetic tool for installing the screws so that the screws do not fall into the guide of the sliding roof.

– If necessary, push the folding mechanism - 3 - on both sides

until the markings - 5 - form a line arrows - b -.
– Insert glass cover - 1 - from the top arrows - a - into the folding
mechanism - 3 -. Insert screws - 2 -, but do not tighten.
– Adjust
unlessfront glass
authorised panelAUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
by ŠKODA
⇒ “2.7withAdjust glass panel at front”, page 186 .
– Tighten screws -2-. Tightening torque - 7 Nm.

– Place blind - 2 - on glass cover - 1 - and push onto the attach‐

ment.
– After all work has been done, carry out a standard run proce‐
dure of the sunroof motor with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
⇒ “2.17 Teach sliding sunroof control unit ”, page 208 .
2.5 Removing and installing the rear glass

panel
Removing
Note
Use a magnetic tool for removing the screws so that the screws do not fall into the guide of the sliding roof.


– Remove the screws - 2 - for glass cover - 1 - left and right.

– Slide the rear glass cover - 1 - under the front glass cover
- 3 - with light force arrow - a - .
– Only remove the rear glass cover - 1 - from the roof cutout
- 2 - at the rear part arrows - b - .
– Slide rear glass cover - 1 - inclined towards the top arrow
- c - and over the roof - 2 - and remove underneath the front
glass cover - 3 -.
Install Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Note
♦ Always use new screws when installing the glass cover.

♦ Use a magnetic tool for installing the screws so that the screws do not fall into the guide of the sliding roof.

Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

– Insert the rear glass cover - 1 - from the top and at an angle
under the front glass cover - 3 -.
– Insert the rear glass cover - 1 - in the rear section downwards
into the roof cutout - 2 - and push to the rear.

– Insert screws - 2 -, but do not tighten.

– Adjust the rear glass panel - 1 -
⇒ “2.8 Adjust the rear glass cover”, page 187 .
– Tighten the rear screws after adjusting the glass cover. Tight‐
ening torque - 7 Nm.
dure of the sunroof motor

2.6 Adjust the glass cover - check height adjustment
Note
♦ The front glass cover is only adjusted at the front edge, the rear glass cover at the rear edge.
♦ To achieve the best possible external appearance, it is important to make sure that the left and right ad‐
justment is performed as evenly as possible (symmetrical).
♦ The arrow shows the direction of travel.
Check height adjustment

– Check the adjustment of the front glass panel - 1 - and the rear
glass panel - 2 - using a gauge block.
If the measured values differ from the specified values, the cor‐
responding glass panel must be adjusted.

2.7 Adjust glass panel at front
Note
♦ Height adjustment of the glass panel must be performed after the glass panel was released from the sliding
position.
♦ The arrow shows the direction of travel.

⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing the glass roof”, page 176 .
– Only undo the two front screws - 4 - left and right for the front
glass cover - 2 -.
– Set front glass cover - 3 - as per dimensions.
– Tighten left and right screws - 4 -. Tightening torque - 7 Nm.
– Installing glass panel
– Place seal - 5 - on assembly frame.

2.8 Adjust the rear glass cover
Note
The arrow shows the direction of travel.
– Detach the inner seal - 5 -.

– Release screws - 4 - for rear glass cover - 3 -.
– Set rear glass cover - 3 - as per dimensions.
– Tighten left and right screws - 4 -. Tightening torque - 7 Nm.
– Place sealwith-respect
5 - on assembly
to the correctness frame.
2.9 Removing and installing sun roof frame
Note
A second mechanic is required for removing and installing the

assembly frame.

Removing
– Remove roof trim panel

– Remove water drain hoses from the supports.
– Disconnect the plug connection for the wire harness on the
sliding roof motor.
– Remove screws - 2 - up to the centre screws, right and left.
Note
Hold the frame in place with a 2nd mechanic.

– Only removewith
the lasttoscrews
respect now.
the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
– Take the assembly frame - 1 - from the vehicle.

Install

– With the aid of another mechanic, lift the assembly frame

- 1 - into the vehicle.
– When installing the assembly frame - 1 - use the 2 cylindrical
pins (reversed drill ∅ 8 mm) to the centering holes front and
rear - arrows - and align to the roof.
– Insert screws - 2 -, but do not tighten.
– Connect all water drain hoses - 3Protected
-. by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted

– Tighten the screws in the sequence - 1 through 9-.

– Tighten the remaining screws - arrow -.
2.10 Removing and installing the draft deflec‐

tor
Removing

– Fully open the front glass panel.

– Unhook tension springs - 2 - arrow - a - .
– Slide air deflector frame - 1 - with support clip - 4 - towards the
front arrow - b - and remove from guide.

– Unlock all catch pegs - 4 - - arrow - .

– Raise air deflector - 1 - completely with the net - 2 - and frame
- 3 - from the support.
Install

– Press the frame - 3 - for the air deflector - 1 - into the support
- arrow -.
– All locking lugs - 4 - must engage.

– Insert air deflector frame - 1 - with support clip -3- into the guide
and slide to towards the rear arrow - b - .
– Hook in tension springs - 2 - arrow - a - .
2.11 Removing and installing control unit for

sunroof
Removing
Caution
The glass panel drive for the sun roof must only be removed
and installed when the roof is closed (zero position).
Conditions for removing and installing the drive are as follows:
Engine and ignition switched off, remove ignition key and open
door.

Removing
– Remove light unit/control front ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr.
96 .
– Raise the sunroof motor - 1 - downwards a little and swivel
downwards.
– Disconnect plug connection -4-.
Install

– Install sliding roof - 1 - and screw in the screws - 2 -. Tightening

torque - 3.5 Nm.
– Connect the plug connection - 4 -.
– Install light unit/control front ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 .
– After all work is done, carry out a standard run procedure of
the sunroof motor
2.12 Removing and installing roof blind con‐

trol unit
Removing

– Remove roof trim panel

– Disconnect the el. plug connection - 2 - at the motor for the
sun blind - 1 -.
– Remove the motor for the sun blind -1-.
Install
– Align the sun blind before installing the motor for the sun blind
so that it is in parallel.

– Measure the size of the gap, dimension - a - between the arch

support for roller blind - 1 - and roller blind housing - 2 - and
adjust.
Tightening torque
– 3.5 Nm
dure of the motor for the sun blind
page 208 .
2.13 Close the sliding roof manually
Note
♦ During power failure, the sliding/tilting roof with glass panel can be moved at the drive using a commercially
available hexagonal wrench.
♦ It must be turned using increased force because the drive does not separate from the gearing mechanism.

– Insert the Allen keys in the screw - 3 - of the drive - 1 -.

– Close the glass panel by turning the screw -3-.
2.14 Removing and installing outer seal for

the sliding roof frame
Removing

– Remove the installation frame

⇒ “2.9 Removing and installing sun roof frame”, page 187 .
– Disconnect the adhesive surface - 3 - of the external seal
- 1 - from the roof - 2 -.unless
Install

– Remove the existing adhesive residues in a suitable way.

– The adhesive surface on the roof cutout must be dust- and
grease-free.
– Completely clean the adhesive surface, e.g. with cleaning sol‐
ution - D 009 401 04- .
– Coat the adhesive surfaces on the roof cut-out with wiping
cloth for glass/paint primer.
– Follow
Protected the airing
by copyright. Copying time.
for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
–withAlign
respect the
to thenew external
correctness seal in- this
of information 1 -document.
throughCopyright
the connection
by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
- arrow - to the middle of rear the roof cutout.
– Remove the protective film for the adhesive film - 3 - and press
on the seal to the roof - 2 -.
– Evenly trim any excess length on the outer seal.
– Firmly press the outer seal 2 x all the way around, e.g. with
press-on roll for door damping film - 3356- .
– Install the installation frame

2.15 Removing and installing glass panel seal
Removing
– Remove rear glass panel
– Remove seal in the side region - 4 - from the rear glass cover
- 1 - on the side arrow - b - .
– Remove seal in the front region - 3 - from the rear glass cover
- 1 - upwards arrow - b - .
Install
– Use detergent so that the seal slips more easily into the sup‐
port.
– Press in seal in the front region - 3 - from the top into the sup‐
port of the glass cover - 1 -.
– Press in seal in the side region - 4 - into the support of the
glass cover - 1 -.
– Install rear glass panel

2.16 Removing and installing the sliding roof

screen
Removing
Note
♦ During a power failure, the sun blind can be moved manually into the removal position (fully opened) by
turning the motor for the sun blind using a commercially available socket wrench
⇒ “2.13 Close the sliding roof manually”, page 198 .
♦ Keep the parts clean when working on the cloth for the sun blind or cover them up. Wear protective gloves
if necessary.
Removing
– Adjust the sun blind completely into the opened position.
– Remove front glass panel
– Remove rear glass panel
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing the rear glass panel”,
page 180 .

– Remove the sunroof frame

– Press locking device - 3 - downwards arrow - a -.
– Move the arch support - 4 - completely to the side arrow
-b-.
– Move arch support - 4 - on opposite side from the blind feed
- 2 - towards the rear arrow - c - .
– If necessary, remove the arch support - 4 - out of the
sunscreen - 1 - completely to one side arrow - d - .
Note
Make sure that the cloth of the roller blind is not damaged during subsequent work.
– Carefully lift the hook on the blind feed using a slotted screw‐
driver.
– Remove the sun blind with blind feed from the guide towards
the rear.
– Repeat the work steps for the opposite side.


– Unlock the catch with a slotted screwdriver - 5 - - a - .
– Remove sun blind - 1 - complete with roller blind support left
and right - 2 - from the sliding roof frame to the rear arrow
- d - and upwards arrow - e -.
– Lift the sun blind with blind support from the sunroof frame
completely arrow - b - .
Install
Note
The arch support for the roller blind and cables for the sun blind must not be greased.

– Slide in the sun blind - 1 - into the sunroof frame completely

with roller blind support left and right - 2 -.
– Insert the roller blind support into the guides and lock.
– Install screws -3-. Tightening torque - 3 Nm.

Note Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
After installing the sun blind, check for synchronous running and smooth operation. To do so, move the drive
for the sun blind by manually operating the motor with a commercially available hexagonal wrench and pay
attention to wrinkle formation and loss of shape of the cloth for the roller blind.
dure of the motor for the sun blind
page 208 .

2.17 Teach sliding sunroof control unit
Note
♦ After replacing the glass cover, an engine, or folding mechanism, carry out an initial run procedure with the
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester or with a mechanical procedure, see below.
♦ During the initial run procedure, the closing force limiter is switched off.
Standard run procedure of sliding roof motor

Ignition switched on, roof closed, rotary switch in home position.
– Hold folded-out switch for sunroof -1- and keep in this position
for the entire initial run procedure (approx. 20 s).
– During the teach run, the glass cover opens up and is then
closed fully.
– After the glass cover is in the closed final position again, the
initial run procedure ends and the button can be released.
2.18 Teach control unit for screen for sliding

roof
Note
♦ After replacing the glass cover, an engine, or folding mecha‐

nism, carry out an initial run procedure with the ⇒ Vehicle
diagnostic tester or with a mechanical procedure, see below.
♦ During the initial run procedure, the closing force limiter is
switched off.
Ignition is switched on.

– Press button - 3 - and keep it in this position during the entire

initial run procedure (approx. 20 s).
– The screen for sliding roof opens in the end position and is
then fully closed.
– After the screen is in the closed final position again, the initial
run procedure ends and the button can be released.

3 Water drain hoses

⇒ “3.1 Summary of components - water drain hoses”, page 210
⇒ “3.2 Cleaning the water drain hoses”, page 211
⇒ “3.3 Removing and installing water drain hoses”, page 212
3.1 Summary of components - water drain hoses
1 - Front water drain hoses

❑ Clean
⇒ “3.2 Cleaning the wa‐
ter drain hoses”,
page 211 .
stalling water drain ho‐
ses”, page 212 .
2 - Rear water drain hoses
❑ Clean
⇒ “3.2 Cleaning the wa‐
ter drain hoses”,
page 211 .
stalling water drain ho‐
ses”, page 212 .
3 - Front water drain valve
4 - Retaining clip
5 - Retaining clip
6 - Rear water drain valve

3.2 Cleaning the water drain hoses
Front water drain hoses

The front water drain hoses - 1 - run through the A pillars and end
in the plenum chamber.
page 16 .
– Clean the lower drain valve - 3 - by cleaning the water drain
hose - 1 - e.g. with a Bowden wire.
Rear water drain hoses
The rear water drain hoses - 2 - run through the D pillars and end
in the rear outer floor panels.
– Remove rear lower bumper cover
⇒ “2 Rear bumper”, page 224 .
– Clean the lower drain valve - 6 - by cleaning the water drain
hose - 2 - e.g. with a Bowden wire.
3. Water drain hoses 211

3.3 Removing and installing water drain hoses
Note
♦ When replacing the water drain hose, shorten the replacement part as required.
♦ The arrangement of the sticker and protective film must be taken from the old part.
Remove front water drain hose

– Remove A-pillar trim panel
⇒ “3.1 Removing and installing top trim panel of pillar A”, page
404 .
– Unhook roof trim ⇒ “10 Moulded headliner”, page 439 .
– Remove clip -4-.
– Remove water drainProtected
hose-1- with drain
by copyright. Copyinghoses -3-.
for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Install with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�

Remove rear water drain hose

– Remove D-pillar trim panel
Combi)”, page 418 .
⇒ “7.5 Removing and installing the side luggage compartment
trim panel (Octavia III - Combi)”, page 429 .
– Unhook roof trim ⇒ “10 Moulded headliner”, page 439 .
– Remove clips -5-.
– Remove rear water drain hose-2- with drain valves -6-.
Install
3. Water drain hoses 213

63 – Bumpers
1 Front bumper
⇒ “1.1 Summary of components - Front bumper”, page 214
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing the front bumper”, page 215
⇒ “1.3 Summary of components - Front bumper”, page 217
⇒ “1.4 Summary of components - Front bumper RS”, page 218
⇒ “1.5 Summary of components - Front bumper SCOUT”,
page 219
⇒ “1.6 Summary of components - Front bumper bracket”,
page 220
⇒ “1.7 Cutting out the openings for the parking aid sensors (drill)”,
page 221
⇒ “1.8 Cutting openings for park steering assistant sender”, page
222
1.1 Summary of components - Front bump‐

er
Note

into consideration when removing and installing the front bumper.
214 Rep. gr.63 - Bumpers

1 - Screw
1.5 Nm.
2 - Screw
3.5 Nm.
3 - Front bumper
❑ Removing
stalling the front bump‐
er”, page 215 .
❑ Installing
er”, page 215 .
4 - Screw
Nm.
1.2 Removing andCopying

Protected by copyright. installing
for private orthe front
commercial bump‐
purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
erunless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
Removing
1. Front bumper 215

– Remove front wheelhouse liners

page 252 .
– Remove screws -2- (3.5 Nm).
– Disconnect the hose to the windscreen cleaning system (if in‐
stalled) ⇒ Electrical system ; Rep. gr. 92 . with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
– Disconnect the existing connectors of the electrical compo‐
nents (sensor for pedestrian accident protection).

– Insert the screwdriver into the bores in the upper wall

- arrows - and press off the lock hook of the guide profile by
pressing.
– Detach the front bumper - 3 - parallel from the vehicle with the
assistance of a 2nd mechanic.
Install
– Observe the parallelism and the correct gap sizes of the front
bumper - 1 - ⇒ Body Repairs; Rep. gr. 00; Rozměry spár kar‐
oserie; Přední část karoserie .
1.3 Summary of components - Front bumper
1 - Decorative frame
❑ Clipped into the bump‐
er.
2 - Bumper holder
3 - Bumpers
❑ Removing
er”, page 215 .
❑ Installing
er”, page 215 .
4 - Left fog light
❑ Removing and instal‐
ling: ⇒ Electrical Sys‐
tem; Rep. gr. 94 .
5 - Left grid
er.
ic Catalogueunless
of Original
Parts . with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
6 - Middle ventilation grid

er.
ic Catalogue of Original
Parts .
7 - Right grid
er.
1. Front bumper 217

8 - Right fog light

❑ Removing and installing: ⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr. 94 .
9 - Bumper holder
1.4 Summary of components - Front bumper RS
1 - Radiator grill
er.
3 - Bumper holder
4 - Cap for headlight washer
system
5 - Left grid
er.
Parts .
6 - Left fog light
tem; Rep. gr. 94 .
7 - Bumpers
❑ Removing
stalling the front bump‐ Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
er”, page 215 . unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
❑ Installing
er”, page 215 .
er.
Parts .
9 - Bottom bumper cover
10 - Right fog light
11 - Right grid
❑ Clipped into the bumper.
❑ Assignment ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts .
12 - Ventilation grid for clearance control control unit
❑ Clip in the grid ⇒ Item 8 (page 218) .
13 - Bore cover for towing eye
14 - Cap for headlight washer system
15 - Bumper holder

1.5 Summary of components - Front bumper SCOUT
1 - Radiator grill
er.
er.
3 - Bumper holder
4 - Cap for headlight washer
system
5 - Bumpers
❑ Removing
er”, page 215 .
❑ Installing
er”, page 215 .
6 - Flaring trim Scout - left
er.
7 - Trim strip left
er.
8 - Left fog light
tem; Rep. gr. 94 .
9 - Left grid
er.
10 - Bumper trim panel Scout - left
12 - Bottom bumper cover
13 - Trim panel of centre section - Scout
14 - Right grid
15 - Bumper trim panel Scout - right
1. Front bumper 219

16 - Right fog light

18 - Trim strip right
19 - Flaring trim Scout - right
20 - Cap for headlight washer system
21 - Bumper holder
1.6 Summary of components - Front bumper bracket
1 - Front bumper bracket

Removing
– Removing front bumper

er”, page 215 .
– Remove impact absorb‐

er.
– Remove clearance con‐

trol control unit ⇒ Elec‐ Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
trical system; Rep. gr. with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
27 .
Install
Installation is carried out in the
reverse order.
2 - Screw
8 Nm.
3 - Screw
55 Nm.
4 - Screw
8 Nm.

5 - Clearance control control unit

Removing and installing ⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr. 27 .
Note
Adjust clearance control control unit

after installation⇒ Suspension;
Rep. gr. 44 , ⇒ Electrical system;
Rep. gr. 27 , ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic
tester .
1.7 Cutting out the openings for the parking

aid sensors (drill)
Predrilling openings - front bumper
Note
Avoid damage to the painted bumper side!
– Removing the bumper

– In the area of the sketched out axle crosses (from the inside
of the bumper), mark the centres for drilling four openings us‐
ing a suitable tool.
– Drill the openings with a diameter of 8 mm.
Openings for theby sensors
unless authorised ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Use the cutting tool BEA 000 001 to cut out the opening (di‐
ameter 18 mm).
1. Front bumper 221

– Use a step drill in order to drill the openings.

– First of all make the openings from the outer side of the bumper
when using a step drill. Complete the work step from the inner
side of the bumper.
– Trim the openings in a suitable manner in order to avoid dam‐
age to the paintwork.
– The glueing procedure of new sensor holders is described in
the workshop manual ⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr. 94 .
– After installing the sensors, install the front bumper
Predrilling the opening - rear bumper (RS, SCOUT)
Note

⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing the rear bumper”, page 226 .
– In the area of the sketched out axle crosses (from the inside
of the bumper), mark the centres for drilling four openings us‐
ing a suitable tool.
– Drill the openings with a diameter of 8 mm.
Openings for the sensors
– Use the cutting tool BEA 000 001 to cut out the opening (di‐
ameter 18 mm).
– Use a step drill in order to drill the openings.

– First of all make the openings from the outer side of the bumper
when using a step drill. Complete the work step from the inner
side of the bumper.
– Trim the openings in a suitable manner in order to avoid dam‐
age to the paintwork.
– The glueing procedure of new sensor holders is described in
the workshop manual ⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr. 94 .
– After installing the sensors, install the front bumper
⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing the rear bumper”, page 226 .
1.8 Cutting openings for park steering as‐

sistant sender
Front bumper
Note Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted

Cut out opening

page 252 .
– Use -šroubový děrovač - TME01- in order to cut out the open‐
ing.
– The position of the opening for the park steering assistant
sender is marked on the inside of the bumper.
– After cutting out the opening, inspect for burrs, if necessary
clean the edges.
– Proceed in the same way on the opposite side of the bumper.
– The work sequence for the removal and installation of the
sender is described in the workshop manual ⇒ Electrical Sys‐
tem; Rep. gr. 94 .
– Install the front wheelhouse liner after installing and connect‐
ing the park steering assistant sender
page 252 .
Rear bumper
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing the rear wheelhouse liner”,
page 253 .
– Use -šroubový děrovač - TME01- in order to cut out the open‐

ing - 2 -.
– The position of the opening for the park steering assistant
sender is marked
AUTO A.on the inside ofS.the
does bumper - 1or -.
unless authorised by ŠKODA S. ŠKODA AUTO A. not guarantee accept any liability
– After cutting out the opening, inspect for burrs, if necessary
clean the edges.
– Proceed in the same way on the opposite side of the bumper.
– The work sequence for the removal and installation of the
sender is described in the workshop manual ⇒ Electrical Sys‐
tem; Rep. gr. 94 .
– Install the rear wheelhouse liner after installing and connecting
the park steering assistant sender
page 253 .
1. Front bumper 223

2 Rear bumper
⇒ “2.1 Summary of components - rear bumper”, page 224
⇒ “2.2 Summary of components - rear bumper RS”, page 225
⇒ “2.3 Summary of components - rear bumper SCOUT”,
page 226
⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing the rear bumper”, page 226
⇒ “2.5 Rear bumper bracket and runners”, page 228
2.1 Summary of components - rear bumper
Note

into consideration when removing and installing the rear bumper.
1 - Screw
1.5 Nm.
2 - Side guide profile left
❑ Screwed together with
the side part.
3 - Guide profile centre left
4 - Guide profile centre right
5 - Side guide profile right
the side part.
6 - Screw
20 Nm.
7 - Bumper bracket
8 - Rear bumper
❑ Removing
stalling the rear bump‐
er”, page 226 .
❑ Installing
er”, page 226 .

2.2 Summary of components - rear bumper RS
1 - Rear bumper
❑ Removing
er”, page 226 .
❑ Installing
er”, page 226 .
er.
3 - Rear spoiler
er.
4 - Exhaust pipe with mounting
bracket
5 - Right reflector
er.
6 - Middle reflector
er.
7 - Left reflector
er.
8 - Exhaust pipe with mounting
bracket
2. Rear bumper 225

2.3 Summary of components - rear bumper SCOUT
1 - Flaring trim of rear wheel

er.
2 - Rear bumper
❑ Removing
er”, page 226 .
❑ Installing
er”, page 226 .
3 - Flaring trim of rear wheel
er.
er.
5 - Spoiler - right side
er.
6 - Right reflector
er.
7 - Spoiler - centre section
er.
8 - Bumper strip
er.
9 - Spoiler - left side
er.
10 - Left reflector
2.4 Removing and installing the rear bump‐

er
Removing

– Remove tail lights ⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr. 94 .

– Remove the screws -7- in the area of the left and right wheel‐
house.
– Remove the screws - 6 - that connect the edge of the bumper
with the wing, from the top.
– Remove the screws of the cover for the underbody - 8 -.
– Remove the screws - 9 - from below.
– Remove rear bumper - 3 - out of the catches on the lateral
guide sections arrows - b - .
Carry out further installation only with the assistance of a second
mechanic.
– Press, e.g. using a screwdriver, to undo the catches arrows
- b - into guide profiles -1 and 2 -.
– Detach the rear bumper -3 - parallel from the vehicle arrows
- c -.
ponents.
Install
– Fit on connectors and attach the cables.
2. Rear bumper 227

– Position the rear bumper with the assistance of a second me‐

chanic.
Note
When fitting the rear bumper, make sure to guide it parallel at the
left and right guide sections.
– Press the rear bumper onto the centre guide section and the
left and right guide section until they lock audibly together.
pairs; Rep. gr. 00; Rozměry spár karoserie; zadní část kar‐
oserie .
– Attach screws and tighten.
2.5 Rear bumper bracket and runners

Removing
– Remove the rear bump‐

er
er”, page 226 .
– Release screws
⇒ Item 8 (page 229) .
– Remove the guide sec‐

tion from the vehicle.
Install


Removing

er
er”, page 226 . Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Release the nuts with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
⇒ Item 5 (page 229) .

Install


Removing
– Remove the rear bumper ⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing the rear bumper”, page 226 .
– Release the nuts ⇒ Item 5 (page 229) .

– Remove the guide section from the vehicle.
Install

Removing
– Release screws ⇒ Item 8 (page 229) .

Install
5 - Nut
6 - Bumper bracket (depending upon vehicle equipment)
Removing
– Remove the bumper bracket from the vehicle.
Install
7 - Screw
8 - Screw
2. Rear bumper 229

3 Rear bumper - Combi

⇒ “3.1 Summary of components - rear bumper ”, page 230
⇒ “3.2 Removing and installing the rear bumper, Combi”,
page 230
⇒ “3.3 Rear bumper bracket and runners”, page 232
3.1 Summary of components - rear bumper
Note

into consideration when removing and installing the rear bumper.
1 - Screw
Nm.
the side part.
the side part.
6 - Screw
Nm.
7 - Screw
❑ Tightening torque: 1, 5
Nm. Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
8 - Bumper bracket
9 - Rear bumper
❑ Removing
stalling the rear bumper,
Combi”, page 230 .
❑ Installing
3.2 Removing and installing the rear bump‐

er, Combi
Removing

– Remove tail lights ⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr. 94 .

– Remove the screws -8- in the area of the left and right wheel‐
house.
– Remove the screws - 7 - that connect the edge of the bumper
with the wing, from the top.
– Remove the screws of the cover for the underbody - 9 -.
– Remove the screws -10- from below.
– Unclip rear bumper - 4 - out of the catches on the lateral guide
sections - 1 and 6 - in direction of arrow - a -.
Carry out further installation only with the assistance of a second
mechanic.
– Press, e.g. using a screwdriver, to undo the catches arrows
- b - into guide profiles -3 and 5 -.
– Detach the rear bumper -4 - parallel from the vehicle arrows
- c -.
ponents.
Install
– Fit on connectors and attach the cables.
3. Rear bumper - Combi 231

– Position the rear bumper with the assistance of a second me‐

chanic.
Note
When fitting the rear bumper, make sure to guide it parallel at the
left and right guide sections.
– Press the rear bumper onto the centre guide section and the
left and right guide section until they lock audibly together.
pairs; Rep. gr. 00; Rozměry spár karoserie; zadní část kar‐
oserie .
– Attach screws and tighten.
3.3 Rear bumper bracket and runners

Removing

er
– Release screws
⇒ Item 8 (page 233) .

Install

2 - Rear left guide profile

Removing

er
– Release the nuts

⇒ Item 5 (page 233) .

Install

3 - Rear right guide profile

– Remove the rear bumper ⇒ “3.2 Removing and installing the rear bumper, Combi”, page 230 .

Install

Removing

Install
5 - Nut
6 - Bumper bracket (depending upon vehicle equipment)
Removing
– Remove the bumper bracket from the vehicle.
Install
7 - Screw
8 - Screw
3. Rear bumper - Combi 233

64 – Glazing
1 Glued windows
⇒ “1.1 Tools”, page 234
⇒ “1.2 Materials”, page 236
⇒ “1.3 Windscreen - Summary of components”, page 236
⇒ “1.4 Removing windscreen”, page 237
⇒ “1.5 Installing windscreen”, page 239
⇒ “1.6 Rear window - Summary of components”, page 239
⇒ “1.7 Removing and installing the rear window”, page 240
⇒ “1.8 Installing rear window”, page 242
⇒ “1.9 Summary of components - rear window (Octavia III - Com‐
bi)”, page 242
⇒ “1.10 Removing and installing the rear window (Octavia III -
Combi)”, page 243
⇒ “1.11 Summary of components - side window (Octavia III -
Combi)”, page 244
⇒ “1.12 Removing and installing the side window (Octavia III -
Combi)”, page 244
⇒ “1.13 Prepare pane for fitting - cut back glue bead”, page 247
⇒ “1.14 Prepare pane for fitting ”, page 247
⇒ “1.15 Prepare body flange for fitting”, page 248
⇒ “1.16 Installation instructions for all the windows”, page 249
⇒ “1.17 Glueing”, page 249
⇒ “1.18 Minimum hardening time”, page 251
⇒ “1.19 Cleaning necessary due to soiling through glue sealing
material”, page 251
1.1 Tools
Note
The removal of the glued windows is described in the separating

device for glued windows e.g. - V.A.G 1474 A- . The correspond‐
ing tools from the separating device for glued windows - VAS
6452- can also be used.
234 Rep. gr.64 - Glazing
Special tools and workshop

equipment required
♦ Separating device for glued
windows - V.A.G 1474 A- or
separating device for glued
windows - VAS 6452-
♦ Suction cup - V.A.G 1344-
♦ Cutting tool - V.A.G 1351-
♦ Window removal set -
V.A.G 1755-
♦ Hand pressure gun -
V.A.G 1628-
♦ Cartridge heater -
V.A.G 1939-
♦ Power knife -
V.A.G 1561 A-
♦ Cutting knife -
V.A.G 1561/2-
♦ Cutting knife -
V.A.G 1561/8-
♦ Setting gauge - 3371-
♦ Cutting knife -
V.A.G 1561/19-
♦ Double cartridge gun -
VAS 5237-
1. Glued windows 235

1.2 Materials
♦ 2K window pane adhesive D 004 660 M2 4) 1 5) 2 7) 4 9) 6
♦ 1K window pane adhesive DH 009 100 A2 4) 1 5) 2 6) 3 8)
5
♦ Activator D 181 802 M1 4) 1

♦ Glass primer/paint primer D 009 200 02 4) 1
♦ Cleaning solution D 009 401 04 4) 1
♦ Primer applicator D 009 500 25 4) 1
♦ Glue remover D 002 000 A24) 1
♦ Cutting thread 357,853,999 B
4) Observe the handling instructions in accordance with the specifications of the

manufacturer in the package insert.
5) Observe minimum hardening time
⇒ “1.18 Minimum hardening time”, page 251 .
6) According to manufacturer's instructions heat up e.g. with cartridge heater -
V.A.G 1939- .
7) Use for example the double cartridge gun - VAS 5237- for processing this
material.
8) Small cartridges 180 ml for sealing work, or if 400 ml cartridge is not adequate.
9) When using a 2K window pane component glue, remove the first 10 cm of the
pressed out glue in order to ensure the correct mixture of both components.
1.3 Windscreen - Summary of components
Caution
For safety reasons, re-using a cut-out windscreen is not per‐

missible. The windscreen must always be replaced with a new
original part. The cut-out rear and side windows can be re-used
after a thorough inspection.
Caution
When replacing the windscreen, on vehicles with a front cam‐

era for driver assistance systems, the camera needs to be
adjusted after adhering the screen ⇒ Chassis; Rep. gr. 44 and
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester!

1 - Windscreen
❑ Remove windscreen
⇒ “1.4 Removing wind‐
❑ Install windscreen
⇒ “1.5 Installing wind‐
2 - PUR - glue sealing material
❑ Bead cross section:
width - b - = 6.5 mm
height - a - = 10 mm (in‐
cluding the sealing sec‐
tion, residual sealant on
window and window
flange).
❑ Minimum hardening
time
⇒ “1.18 Minimum hard‐
ening time”, page 251 .
3 - Body flange
4 - Gap size
❑ From the lateral window
edge up to the A pillar.
❑ Set the constant dimen‐
sion of 2.5 ± 0.5 mm with
the setting gauge -
3371- .
5 - Gap size
❑ From the top window
edge up to the roof
edge.
❑ Set the constant dimen‐
sion of 2.5 ± 0.5 mm with
the setting gauge -
3371- .
6 - Window pane adjuster
❑ Remove the window pane adjuster at the earliest 120 minutes after installing the window pane.
7 - Fitting section
❑ Is part of the windscreen.
❑ It must only be pulled from the fitting section by hand.
❑ Remove the plenum chamber cover
⇒ “1.8 Plenum chamber cover- Summary of components”, page 16 .
❑ Install plenum chamber cover ⇒ “1.8 Plenum chamber cover- Summary of components”, page 16 .
1.4 Removing windscreen

– Remove A-pillar trim panel
404 .
– Remove all sun visors
⇒ “2.7 Summary of components - sun visor”, page 309 .
– Removing interior rear-view mirror
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing the interior rear-view mirror”,
page 291 .

– In vehicles with front camera for driver assistance systems -

R242- remove the front camera ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr.
96 ; Electrical system; Front camera for diver assistance sys‐
tems .
– Remove the connections for the heated windscreen (if fitted).
– Removing the sun visors and interior mirror undoes the moul‐
ded headliner thus increasing the gap between the window
and the moulded headliner. This reduces the risk of damaging
the moulded headliner.
page 16 .
– Slide the cover foil - 1 - between the windscreen and the dash
panel.
– Pull the end of the cutting thread - 2 - through the sealing ma‐
terial into the vehicle interior using the awl.
– Secure the end of the cutting thread with clip - 3 - against pull‐
ing out.
– Insert the cutting thread - 2 - with the help of the pipe - 1 - into
the window frame.
– Lay the cutting thread around the windscreen.
– Ensure that the cutting thread is layed at the corners under the
windscreen.

– Attach the second end of the cutting thread e.g. to the spooler
- V.A.G 1654 A- .
– Position the spooler - V.A.G 1654 A- in “position l”.
– Move the spooler - V.A.G 1654 A- in steps if required and cut
out the windscreen.
– During the cutting procedure, press the cutting thread with a
plastic wedge against the windscreen in order to create a
clearance between the window flange and the dash panel.
1.5 Installing windscreen

Prepare new windscreen for fitting
⇒ “1.13 Prepare pane for fitting - cut back glue bead”,
page 247 .
Prepare body flange for fitting
⇒ “1.15 Prepare body flange for fitting”, page 248 .
Installation instructions
⇒ “1.16 Installation instructions for all the windows”, page 249 .
Gluing on ⇒ “1.17 Glueing”, page 249 .
Minimum hardening
unless time AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
authorised by ŠKODA
⇒ “1.18 Minimum
with respect tohardening
the correctness time”, page
of information 251
in this .
document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
In vehicles with front camera for driver assistance systems -

R242- , install the front camera ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 ;
Electrical system; Front camera for diver assistance systems and
calibrate the front camera ⇒ Chassis, axles, steering; Rep. gr.
44 ; Front camera for diver assistance systems; Calibrating the
front camera for driver assistance systems .
1.6 Rear window - Summary of components

1 - Rear window
❑ Removing
stalling the rear win‐
dow”, page 240 .
❑ Installing
⇒ “1.8 Installing rear
window”, page 242 .
❑ Bead cross section:
width - b - = 6.5 mm
height - a - = 10 mm (in‐
cluding the sealing sec‐
tion, residual sealant on
window and window
flange).
❑ Minimum hardening
time
⇒ “1.18 Minimum hard‐
ening time”, page 251 .
3 - Body flange
4 - Spacer holder
5 - Tailgate
6 - Window pane adjuster
7 - Adhesive bead joint
❑ The joint of the adhesive
bead should be placed
in this area.
1.7 Removing and installing the rear win‐

dow Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Protected by copyright.
Removing damaged
with respect window
WARNING
It is essential to wear protective goggles and gloves when cut‐

ting hardened PUR glue sealing material and when handling
the cutting cord.
– Protect vehicle interior from glass splinters.

– Remove high-level brake light ⇒ Electrical system ⇒ Rep. gr.
94 .
– Remove rear window wiper (if present) ⇒ Electrical System
⇒ Rep. gr. 92 .
– Disconnect the plug connections of the heated rear window
and press the contact tabs onto the window.
– Remove connector from the window aerial (where fitted).

– Cover the painted surfaces along the window with textile ad‐
hesive tape.
– Remove glass residue down to the adhesive cement.
– Cut back the adhesive cement e.g.with electrical cutting tool -
V.A.G 1561/A- to approx. 1 mm thickness.
– Suction off glass residues in the vehicle as well as in the hol‐
lows of the tailgate (release cable ducts) with a vacuum clean‐
er.
Removing undamaged window
WARNING

the cutting cord.
– Remove high level brake light ⇒ Electrical system ⇒ Rep. gr.

94 (does not apply for Octavia II Combi).
– Remove rear window wiper (if present) ⇒ Electrical System
⇒ Rep. gr. 92 .
hesive tape.
– Pull the cutting thread with the awl through the sealing material
towards the inside.
– Secure the end of the cutting thread with the pull handle
against pulling out.
– Lay the cutting thread around the rear window - 1 - and guide
the second end of the thread towards the inside.
– Attach the end of the cutting thread e.g. to the spooler -
V.A.G 1654 A- .
– Slide the cover foil carefully between the rear window and the
moulded headliner.
– Place the spooler - V.A.G 1654 A- in the indicated position (l

and Vl).
– Move the spooler - V.A.G 1654 A- in steps if required and cut
out the rear window.
– During the cutting procedure, press the cutting thread with a
wedge against the rear window to create a clearance at the
window flange.
– Use the suction cup to remove the window from the vehicle.
Note
A second mechanic isunless
required for removing the window.

1.8 Installing rear window

– Prepare new window for fitting
page 247 .
– Prepare new windscreen for fitting
page 247 .
– Prepare body flange for fitting
– Place the window in the fitting location on the body flange with
the help of two suction cups.
– Installation instructions
⇒ “1.16 Installation instructions for all the windows”,
page 249 . ⇒ “1.17 Glueing”, page 249 .
– Minimum hardening time
1.9 Summary of components - rear window (Octavia III - Combi)
1 - Rear window
the rear window
installing the rear win‐
dow (Octavia III - Com‐
bi)”, page 243 .
3 - Stop buffer
❑ For installation of win‐Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Protected by copyright.
dow unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
♦ Dimension top - a - = 3 ± 0.5 mm

♦ Dimension bottom - b - = 2.5 ± 0.5 mm

♦ Dimension left and right = 3.8 ±0.5 mm
1.10 Removing and installing the rear win‐

dow (Octavia III - Combi)
Removing damaged window
WARNING

the cutting cord.

– Remove the connections for the rear window heating.
– Remove rear window wiper (if present) ⇒ Electrical System;
Rep. gr. 92 .
– Suction vacuum glass residues in the vehicle with a vacuum
cleaner.
hesive tape.
– Cut back adhesive cement to a thickness of approx. 1 mm.
WARNING

ting hardened
ProtectedPUR glueCopying
by copyright. sealing material
for private and purposes,
or commercial when handling
in part or in whole, is not permitted
the cutting cord.
Note
A second mechanic is required for removing the window.
– Removing top trim panel for tailgate

⇒ “6.4 Removing and installing the tailgate trim (Octavia III -
– Remove the high level brake light ⇒ Electrical System; Rep.
gr. 94 .
– Remove rear window wiper (if present) ⇒ Electrical System;
Rep. gr. 92 .
hesive tape.
– Further removal occurs as for the windscreen
⇒ “1.4 Removing windscreen”, page 237 .

Installing rear window

Prepare flange for fitting
1.11 Summary of components - side window (Octavia III - Combi)
1 - Side section
2 - Guide bolt
❑ Is part of the side win‐
dow. When removing
cut through with cutting
thread.
3 - Sealing section
❑ Is part of the side win‐
dow.
4 - Side window
1.12 Removing and installing the side win‐

dow (Octavia III - Combi)
Removing damaged window
WARNING

the cutting cord. with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�


– Remove top trim panel of C and D pillar
⇒ “3.7 Removing and installing the top C pillar trim panel (Oc‐
tavia III - Combi)”, page 412 and
⇒ “4 Removing and installing the wheel house trim of the C
pillar (Octavia III - Combi)”, page 416 .
hesive tape.
– Cut back the adhesive cement e.g.with electrical cutting tool -
V.A.G 1561/A- to approx. 1 mm thickness.
– Suction vacuum glass residues in the vehicle with a vacuum
cleaner.
WARNING

the cutting cord.
– Remove top trim panel of C and D pillar

tavia III - Combi)”, page 412 and
– Cover the painted surfaces along the window
Protected with
by copyright. textile
Copying ad‐or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
for private
hesive tape. unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
Note
♦ In order to facilitate the insertion of the cutting cord, apply lu‐

bricant (e.g. detergent) on the outer side of the window flange.
♦ In order to avoid damage to the paintwork, the cord ends must
be inserted correctly into the needle from below, at the same
time a protective foil should be glued in the area of the pierced
cement.
♦ Check several times the correct fitting of the cutting cord dur‐
ing assembly.

– Cut through the adhesive kit e.g. with a knife in the lower area
of the window - arrow -.
– Pierce adhesive kit (Pos. 1) with the piercing needle (Pos. 2).
Note
When piercing, observe the dimension -a- which can be marked

on the needle with e.g. an adhesive tape, because of possible
damage to the paintwork of the vehicle.
a = 60 ± 5 mm
– Draw cutting cord through the piercing needle (Pos. 2).
– Insert the cutting cord all around the side window behind the
sealing profile and fix with adhesive tape -arrows-.
– Attach the spooler -V.A.G 1654A- (Pos. 1) to the rear corner,
to the inner side of the window, and secure the cord end in the
front coil (Pos. 2).
– Cut through the adhesive cement up to the area marked with
an - X - using the spooler -V.A.G 1654A- . Use the steering
roller -V.A.G 1474/1- in the window corner.
– Offset spooler.
– Pull the other cutting cord end (Pos. 2) into the vehicle and
attach it to the rear coil (Pos. 1).
– Cut through the adhesive kit up to the area marked with an
- X -. Use the steering roller -V.A.G 1474/1- in the window cor‐
ner.

– Alternatively cut through the remaining adhesive kit with both

coils. The cross point (Pos. 1) should be located exactly be‐
tween the coils.
– Remove window with spooler -V.A.G 1654A- .
– Remove adhesive tapes.
Installing side window
Prepare flange for fitting
Installation instructions
⇒ “1.16 Installation instructions for all the windows”, page 249 .
Waiting time ⇒ “1.18 Minimum hardening time”, page 251 .
– After glueing on the window, mount the plug of the window
aerial (if present).
1.13 Prepare pane for fitting - cut back glue

bead
Note
♦ Cut back the remaining adhesive sealant to 1...2 mm just prior

to adhering again. While doing so, do not damage the glass/
primer and ceramic layer.
♦ The remainder of the sealing compound serves as a base for
the newly applied adhesive sealant.
WARNING
Do not prime the adhesive surface and do not treat with clean‐
ing solution. Keep the adhesive surfaces free of dirt or grease.
Exception: If the bonding is not carried out immediately after cut‐

ting back, the sealing compound must be activated with the
activator - D 181 802 M1- .
1.14 Prepare pane for fitting

All the windows are not pre-layered as a spare part.
Note
♦ The area where the glue bead is applied is neither pre-layered

nor primed.
♦ The sealing lip is a component part of a new windscreen.
– Clean the window edge all around up to a width of 20 mm using

the cleaning solution - D 009 401 04- .
– Then rub the window edge dry using a non-fluffy cloth.

Caution
The ceramic layer on the window is no glass/paint primer! It is

absolutely essential to prime it before applying the sealing ma‐
terial! Only use glass/paint primer D 009 200 02!
– Now apply the glass/paint primer by means of the applicator -

D 009 500 25- uniformly in one go.
♦ Minimum hardening time approx. 10 minutes.
1.15 Prepare body flange for fitting

– Cut back the sealing compound on the body flange using the
U-shape cutting knife - V.A.G 1561/3- , however do not remove
completely. Leave 1 - 2 mm of the old adhesive.
Note
The remainder of the glue sealing material serves as a base for

the newly applied adhesive sealant. Keep the adhesive surfaces
free of dirt or grease.
Caution
The activator must not come into contact with paintwork, oth‐
erwise there will be paint damage.
Exception: If the bonding is not carried out immediately after cut‐

ting back, the sealing compound must be activated with the
activator - D 181 802 M1- .
♦ If the body flange was reworked or only partly replaced, clean
this area again after painting and treat it with glass/paint pri‐
mer.
Note
Under some circumstances, it is possible that a laser welding

seam is not present in the area of the adhesive bead. Then the
exposed welding seam must be sealed before glueing the window
with the window pane adhesive.
– If the laser welding seam -3- at the metal flange -4- is not cov‐
ered with an adhesive bead -1-, coat the laser welding seam
-3- with glass/paint primer - D 009 200 02- -3-. Then fill up the
laser welding seam with window pane adhesive - DH 009 100
A2- - 1 -. Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted

1.16 Installation instructions for all the win‐

dows
– Apply the adhesive cement all around at a right angle to the
window.
WARNING
The window must be inserted within 10 minutes as otherwise

the adhesion of the window glue may be poor.
Do not apply the adhesive bead too thick and do not press the
windows too hard on the body flange. Oozed adhesive can be
seen in the area of the joints because the windows do no longer
have any sealing lips.
♦ Insert the window into the body flange, for example using the
suction cup - V.A.G 1344- , take the mean and press in up to
the spacer web.
♦ Re-stick any existing stickers (for example for airbag).
1.17 Glueing
1 - Glue bead
2 - Glass/paint primer
3 - Glass
a - Width of glue bead - 8 mm.
b - Height of glue bead - 12 mm
c - Distance between outer edge of glass and centre of glue bead
- 8 mm.
Note
On the rear window on Octavia Combi, the adhesive bead must

be applied as close as possible to the outer edge of the window
because of possible touching of the collecting bar for the rear
window heater and the resulting corrosion of the tailgate. At the
same time ensure that not too much glue is pressed out of the
bottom edge of the window after pressing on the window.

– After completing the preparations cut back the nozzle for ap‐
plying the glue as shown in the figure.
– Dimension -a- 12 mm.
– Width of glue bead - 8 mm.
– Application direction -arrow-.
Note
♦ The glue bead cross section is dependent on the cross sec‐

tional area of the nozzle and the application speed.
♦ When using 1C window glass adhesive -DH 009 100- or -DH
009 100 03- , preheat the glue cartridges for 20 minutes in the
warming box, e.g. -V.A.G 1939- .
♦ Use disposable gloves when working with glues and adhesive
materials.
Caution
Comply with the manufacturer's handling instructions.
– Apply the glue on the sealing profile (Pos. 1) perpendicular to

the window surface and all around it.
Note
♦ Apply glue sealing material at a temperature of 10 °C to 30°C.

♦ Open all vehicle windows before fitting the window into the
frame.
– Insert window pane into the frame with the aid of two suction
cup tools e.g. -V.A.G 1344- , centre and press onto the spacer
catches.
Caution
The window pane must be inserted immediately after applying

the adhesive kit, as otherwise the adhesion of the glue and
sealing materials may be poor.
– Insert
unless window pane inAUTO
frame A. S.using
ŠKODA pane
AUTO A.positioning wedges
authorised by ŠKODA S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
or eccentric pieces
with respect to (applies
the correctness for thein windscreen).
of information this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
– Fix the window during hardening process with adhesive tape.

– Any adhesive kit which was applied too thickly and is pressed
out up to the heating filaments of the heatable rear window
must be removed.

1.18 Minimum hardening time
WARNING
Comply with special requirements when replacing glued win‐

dows. Among these are for example, that a newly glued wind‐
screen must fulfill the operational safety in the event of an
accident after a prescribed minimum hardening time.
The minimum hardening time for all the windows is 3 hours when
applying the 2K adhesive - D 004 660 M2- .
With the minimum hardening time is meant the time from the mo‐
ment the window is glued until the vehicle is used. During this
time, the vehicle must stand on a flat surface at room temperature
(at least 15 °C).
WARNING
The vehicle is only safe for driving after the minimum hardening
time has expired.
1.19 Cleaning necessary due to soiling

through glue sealing material
– It is recommended to use glue remover - D 002 000 10- as
cleaning agent. Observe safety regulations while working.
WARNING
When cleaning the vehicle interior, the window which was just
inserted must not be pressed towards the outside.
– Clean the paint surfaces with a dry cloth. Remove the glue
residue with glue remover - D 002 000 A2- .
– Clean the plastic fillings: Allow the glue sealing material to
harden (approx. 1 hour) and then pull off.

66 – Exterior equipment
1 Wheelhouse liner
⇒ “1.1 Removing and installing the front wheelhouse liner”, page
252
page 253
1.1 Removing and installing the front wheel‐

house liner
Removing
– Remove wheel ⇒ Chassis; Rep. gr. 44 ; tightening torques

for the wheel bolts .
– Unscrew the screw - 3 - from the expanding nuts - 2 -.
– Remove the wheelhouse liner - 1 - from the body - 4 -.
252 Rep. gr.66 - Exterior equipment

Install
Note
Check the expanding nuts - 2 - for damage, if necessary replace them.
– Insert wheelhouse liner - 1 - in the wing.

– Install screws -3-. Tightening torque: 2 Nm.
1.2 Removing and installing the rear wheel‐

house liner
Removing
1. Wheelhouse liner 253

– Remove wheel ⇒ Chassis; Rep. gr. 44 ; tightening torques

for the wheel bolts .
– Unscrew the screw - 3 - from the expanding nuts - 2 -.
– Pull out rear wheelhouse liner - 1 -.
Install

Caution
Check the expanding nuts - 2 - for damage, if necessary re‐

place them.
The expanding nuts seal the interior from exhaust gases. In
case of damage, they must absolutely be replaced.
– Insert the wheelhouse liner - 1 - into the wheelhouse without

any kinks.
– Install screws -3-. Tightening torque: 2 Nm.
– Install wheel ⇒ Chassis; Rep. gr. 44 ; tightening torques for
wheel bolts .
1. Wheelhouse liner 255

2 Exterior mirror
⇒ “2.1 Exterior mirror- Summary of components”, page 256
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing exterior mirror glass”, page 257
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing adjustment unit with motor”, page
258
⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing the mirror housing”, page 259
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing the trim”, page 260
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing mounting part”, page 261
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing exterior mirror (electric operating
lever)”, page 262
2.1 Exterior mirror- Summary of components
1 - Mirror base support

❑ Remove and install with
electrical operation
stalling exterior mirror
(electric operating lev‐
er)”, page 262 . Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
2 - Mirror housing with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
stalling the mirror hous‐
ing”, page 259 .
3 - Adjustment unit with motor
stalling adjustment unit
with motor”, page 258 .
4 - Screw
❑ 1 Nm.
5 - Mirror glass
stalling exterior mirror
glass”, page 257 .
6 - Trim
stalling the trim”,
page 260 .
7 - Screw
❑ 1 Nm.
8 - Mounting part
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing mounting part”, page 261 .
9 - Electrical line

2.2 Removing and installing exterior mirror glass
WARNING
Wear protective gloves and protective googles when working!
Removing
– Protect the edges of the housing for damage, e.g. cover with
textile adhesive tape.
– Swivel the mirror glass - 1 - in the maximum
Protectedposition.
– Press off the mirror glass - 1 - from the holder - 2 - and the
housing arrow - a - for example using a wide plastic wedge.

Install
– Press the mirror glass in the centre onto the holder in the
housing.
The mirror glass clicks audibly into place.
2. Exterior mirror 257

2.3 Removing and installing adjustment unit with motor
Removing
– Remove mirror glass.
– Swivel the adjustment unit with motor - 2 - to the side and dis‐
connect the plug.
Install
Installation is carried outbyincopyright.
Protected the reverse order.
Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Tightening torque
withof screws
respect (Pos. 3)of- information
to the correctness 2 Nm. in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�

2.4 Removing and installing the mirror housing
Removing
– Remove mirror glass.
– Unlock catch hooks arrow - a - .
– Pull mirror housing -1- in direction of arrow -B-.
Install
– Fit mirror housing - 1 - and press against the direction of arrow
- B - into the catch hooks arrow - A -.
The catch hooks
unless click
authorised audibly
by ŠKODA into
AUTO place.
A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability

2.5 Removing and installing the trim
Removing
– Remove mirror glass
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing exterior mirror glass”,
page 257 .
– Removeunless
mirror
Protected byhousing
⇒ “2.4 Removing
with respect and installingof information
to the correctness the mirror housing”,
in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
page 259 .
– Unscrew screws - A -.
– Release catch hooks - B -.
– Remove trim panel - 1 -.
Install

2.6 Removing and installing mounting part
Removing
– Remove mirror glass
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing exterior mirror glass”,
page 257 .
– Remove mirror housing
⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing the mirror housing”,
page 259 .
– Unclip catch hooks arrows - A -.
– Pull out mounting part - 1 - and remove from mirror base sup‐
port in direction of arrow - B -.
Install

2.7 Removing and installing exterior mirror

(electric operating lever)
Removing

– Disconnect the plug connection - 2 - of the electrical line - 3 -
for the exterior mirror - 1 -.
– Unscrew screw -4-.

– Swivel out the exterior rear-view mirror - 1 - in the lower area

from the door and pull out of the window run - 2 - -arrow-.
– Guide the cable - 3 - through the opening in the door.
Install

– Guide the electrical cable - 3 - through the opening in the door.
– Insert the exterior mirror - 1 - into the window run - 2 -.

– Fit the screw - 4 - into the mirror housing - 1 -. Tightening tor‐

que: 12 Nm.
– Attach el. line - 3 -.
– Connect the plug connection - 2 -.

3 Trailer coupling
⇒ “3.1 Summary of components - Trailer coupling ”, page 266
⇒ “3.2 Summary of components - Trailer coupling (Octavia III -
Combi) ”, page 267
3.1 Summary of components - Trailer coupling
1 - Screw
❑ 3 Nm
4 - Nut
❑ 2.2 Nm
6 - Screw
❑ 55 Nm
7 - Trailer coupling
Removing

⇒ “2.1 Summary of com‐
ponents - rear bumper”,
page 224 .
– Partly remove the heat

shield above the ex‐
haust pipe.
– Remove socket (Pos.

9).
– Remove screws (Pos.

6).
– Pull out trailer coupling

towards the rear out of
the vehicle.
Install

reverse order.
8 - Trailer arm
Removing
– Open lock on control lever.
– Fold back control lever about 90°.
– Remove trailer arm.


9 - Power socket
Removing
– Remove screws.
– Remove power socket housing.
– Detach electric lines.
Install
Note
Use the type of power socket and

the electric installation according to
the relevant national legislation.
3.2 Summary of components - Trailer coupling (Octavia III - Combi)
1 - Screw
❑ 3 Nm
4 - Nut
❑ 2.2 Nm
6 - Screw
❑ 55 Nm
7 - Trailer coupling
Removing

ponents - rear bumper”,
page 224 .
– Partly remove the heat

shield above the ex‐
haust pipe. Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Remove socket (Pos.
9).
– Remove screws (Pos.

6).
– Pull out trailer coupling

towards the rear out of
the vehicle.
Install

reverse order.
3. Trailer coupling 267

8 - Trailer arm
Removing
– Open lock on control lever.
– Fold back control lever about 90°.
– Remove trailer arm.
Install
9 - Power socket
Removing
– Remove screws.
– Remove power socket housing.
– Detach electric lines.
Install
Note
Use the type of power socket and

the electric installation according to
the relevant national legislation.
3.3 Control unit for trailer detection

Removing
– Removing
Protectedside trim panel
by copyright. Copying in
for luggage compartment
private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
⇒ “7.4unless
Removing and
authorised by installing
ŠKODA AUTO A. side luggage
S. ŠKODA AUTO A.compartment
S. does not guarantee trim
or accept any liability
panel”,with
page 428
respect . correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
to the
– Remove control unit connector (Pos. 1).

– Unscrew fixing nuts (2 Nm).
– Take the control unit out of the vehicle.
Install

4 Roof rack (Octavia III - Combi)

⇒ “4.1 Summary of components - roof rack”, page 269
4.1 Summary of components - roof rack
Caution
Do not use any impact screwdrivers during installation and re‐

moval. When removing, use a manual wrench. When installing,
use a manual torque wrench!
Removing
– Unhook moulded headliner
page 439 .
– Remove nuts - 2 - (12 Nm ± 1 Nm).
– Remove roof rack - 1 - from the vehicle.
4. Roof rack (Octavia III - Combi) 269

Install

5 Letterings
⇒ “5.1 Installation instructions”, page 271
⇒ “5.2 Removing and installing the emblem on the tailgate”, page
271
5.1 Installation instructions

♦ Warm up the letterings with a hot-air blower before removing.
♦ If a lettering is removed or installed, only use the glue remover
- D 002 000 10- to remove the glue residues.
♦ If necessary, remove existing glue residues of the adhesive
tape.
♦ Make sure that the adhesive surfaces are free from dust and
grease.
♦ The letterings must be glued on immediately after cleaning.
♦ Remove protective foil from its wrapping until just before as‐
sembly.
♦ The processing temperature is about 21 °C.
♦ The letterings cannot be removed without being damaged.
5.2 Removing and installing the emblem on the tailgate
5. Letterings 271
Removing
– Warm up the emblem - 1 - with a hot-air blower before remov‐
ing.
– Remove the logo from the tailgate - 2 -.
Install
– Pay attention to installation instructions
⇒ “5.1 Installation instructions”, page 271 .
– Detach the protective foil - 3 -.
– Place the emblem - 1 - with the centering pins into the em‐
bossed area of the tailgate - 2 -.
– Forcefully press on the emblem - 1 - .

5.3 Dimensions - Letterings and emblems

on the tailgate
⇒ “5.3.1 Letterings and emblems on the tailgate”, page 273 .
⇒ “5.3.2 Letterings and emblems on the tailgate (Combi)”,
page 274 .
⇒ “5.3.3 Gluing procedure for letterings and emblems”,
page 274 .
5.3.1 Letterings and emblems on the tailgate
1 - Škoda lettering
❑ a = 29.1 ± 0.25 mm
❑ b = 23.6 ± 0.25 mm
❑ c = 23.6 ± 0.25 mm
2 - Tailgate
3 - Superb lettering
❑ d = 22.6 ± 0.25 mm
❑ e = 22.5 ± 0.25 mm Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
❑ f = 28.5 ± 0.25 mm unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
5. Letterings 273
5.3.2 Letterings and emblems on the tailgate (Combi)
1 - Škoda lettering
❑ a = 27.1 ± 0.25 mm
❑ b = 23.3 ± 0.25 mm
❑ c = 23.3 ± 0.25 mm
2 - Tailgate
3 - Superb lettering
❑ d = 22.5 ± 0.25 mm
❑ e = 22.6 ± 0.25 mm
❑ f = 27.3 ± 0.25 mm
5.3.3 Gluing procedure for letterings and em‐

blems
Removing
– Warm up the letterings with a hot-air blower before removing.
– Remove glue residues e.g. with adhesive remover - D 002 000
10- .
– The letterings cannot be removed without being damaged.
Install
– Remove grease, dust and dirt from the surfaces e.g. with
cleaning solution D 009 401 04 before gluing.
– The letterings must be glued on immediately after cleaning.

– Remove protective foil from its wrapping until just before as‐
sembly.
– Glue on the lettering as per the specified dimensions.
– Press onto the tailgate with reasonable force.

– The processing temperature is about 21 °C.
5. Letterings 275
6 Rear spoiler
⇒ “6.1 Summary of components - rear spoiler”, page 276 .
⇒ “6.2 Removing and installing spoiler ”, page 276 .
6.1 Summary of components - rear spoiler
– Rear spoiler -3-.

– Adhesive tape -1-.
– Glue sealing material -2-.
6.2 Removing and installing spoiler
Note
The tailgate and spoiler cannot be removed without being de‐

stroyed without damaging the paintwork.

Removing
– Cover the painted surfaces along the spoiler with textile ad‐
hesive tape.
– Cut off spoiler from the tailgate (cut through glue sealing ma‐
terial) and cut off double-sided adhesive tape, e.g. with cutting
cord -357 853 999 B - .
– Remove the spoiler.
Install
Note
The ambient temperature must be above 18°C during the glueing

procedure of the spoiler!
– Thoroughly clean the adhesive surfaces e.g. with cleaning

solution D 009 401 04.
– Apply glue sealing material D 172 090 A2 into the guiding
groove (Pos. 2) in the spoiler.
– Stick on the spoiler within 15 minutes after applying the glue
sealing material! Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Partially unglue the protective foilwith
from the
respect adhesive
to the correctnesstape on in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
of information
the edges.
– Position the spoiler evenly onto the tailgate.
– Maintain an equal gap of 2 mm from the tailgate.
– Remove the protective foil from the adhesive tape.
– Press the spoiler evenly onto the tailgate.
– Secure spoiler against moving with adhesive tape.
Note
♦ The adhesive cement must dry for 2 hours. Do not drive the
vehicle in this time.
♦ Do not drive through the carwash within 24 hours of gluing on
the spoiler.
6. Rear spoiler 277

7 Rear spoiler (Octavia RS)

⇒ “7.1 Summary of components - Rear spoiler (Octavia RS)”,
page 278 .
⇒ “7.2 Removing and installing the spoiler - RS”, page 278 .
7.1 Summary of components - Rear spoiler (Octavia RS)
– Rear spoiler -1-.

– Glue sealing material -2-.
– Securing bolts - 3 - (5 ± 0.75 Nm).
7.2 Removing and installing the spoiler - RS

Removing
– Cover the painted surfaces along the spoiler supports with
textile adhesive tape.
– Remove screws (Pos. 3).
– Cut off spoiler from the tailgate e.g. with cutting cord -357 853
999 B- (cut through glue sealing material).


Install
Note

– Diameter of the bores in the tailgate = 6.5 mm.

– Bore arrangement for spoiler:
• a = 50 mm
• b = 12 mm
• Clearance from the tailgate edge = 24.5 mm
– Apply glue sealing material D 172 090 A2 into the space for
supports between the bores for screws for glue sealing mate‐
rial.
sealing material!
– Install screw (Pos. 3).
– Screw in bolts lightly.
– Tighten bolts to specified torque in the following order - front
right, rear left, rear right and last of all, front left (cross-ways).
Note
the spoiler.
7. Rear spoiler (Octavia RS) 279

8 Rear spoiler - Octavia Combi RS

⇒ “8.1 Rear spoiler RS - Summary of components ”, page 280 .
⇒ “8.2 Removing and installing spoiler - Combi RS”, page 281 .
8.1 Rear spoiler RS - Summary of components
1. Tailgate
2. Spoiler RS
3. Glue sealing material
4. Double-sided adhesive tape

8.2 Removing and installing spoiler - Combi

RS
Removing
Note

hesive tape.
– Cut off spoiler from the tailgate with available workshop means
(cut through glue sealing material).
Install
Note


groove in the spoiler.
sealing material!
– Partially unglue the protective foil from the adhesive tape on
the edges.
– Maintain an even gap.
Note
the spoiler.
8. Rear spoiler - Octavia Combi RS 281

9 Rear spoiler - Octavia Combi -

Greenline
⇒ “9.1 Greenline rear spoiler - Summary of components ”,
page 282 .
⇒ “9.2 Removing and installing spoiler - Greenline”, page 283 .
9.1 Greenline rear spoiler - Summary of components
1. Tailgate.
2. Plug connector of the brake light.
3. Brake light.
4. Greenline spoiler.
5. Glue sealing material.
6. Double-sided adhesive tape.

9.2 Removing and installing spoiler - Green‐

line
Removing
Note

– Disconnect plug connection of brake light ⇒ Electrical system;

Rep. gr. 94 .
hesive tape.
– Cut off spoiler from the tailgate with available workshop means
(cut through glue sealing material).
Install
Note

– Install brake light to spoiler ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 94 .

groove in the spoiler.
sealing material!
– Partially unglue the protective foil from the adhesive tape on
the edges.
– Maintain an even gap.
Note
the spoiler.
9. Rear spoiler - Octavia Combi - Greenline 283

10 Trim strips - Scout
10.1 Glueing tuning parts

⇒ “10.1.1 Sill panel”, page 284 .
⇒ “10.1.2 Front wing strip”, page 285 .
⇒ “10.1.3 Rear wing strip”, page 286 .
♦ Compressed air pistol, e.g. -V.A.S 5237-
♦ Cleaning agent -D 195 850 A1-
♦ Sandpaper (grain approx. 120)
♦ Glass/paint primer -D 822 150 A1-
♦ Glass/paint primer -D 009 200 02-
♦ Glue sealing material -D 172 090 A2-
Note
♦ You must use new strips each time it is assembled.

♦ Clean and degrease body surfaces.
♦ The contact surfaces of the body are not primed.
♦ The quality of the adhesive connections depends on how well
the body surfaces have been degreased.
♦ The ambient temperature should be approx. 18°C when glue‐
ing the protective strips.
♦ The vehicle must be switched off for at least 1.5 hours at a
temperature of 18°C after the part is glued on before it is se‐
cure for travel.
♦ Do not drive into the carwash within 24 hours of glueing on the
strips!
Overview of gluing sequence for Scout protective strips.

1 - Sill panel
2 - Front wing strip
3 - Rear wing strip
Note
Note the dimensions and shape of the adhesive cement (width: 8

± 1 mm, height 14 ± 2 mm).
10.1.1 Sill panel

– Clean the adhesive surfaces of the body with cleaning agent
-D 195 850 A1- .
– Sand the adhesive surfaces of the tuning parts with sandpaper
and clean with cleaning agent -D 195 850 A1- .
– Apply double-sided adhesive tape to the area indicated -3- on
the sill panel -2-.

– Apply glass/paint primer -D 822 150 A1- and leave to dry.

– After drying, apply the next glass/paint primer for improved
bonding -D 009 200 02- and leave to dry.
– Apply adhesive cement -D 172 090 A2- to the sill panel in area
- 4 -.
– Position the sill panel and evenly bring to the correct position
across the entire length.
– Only remove the protective film of the double-side adhesive
tape after applying the tuning part to the body.
– Press the sill panel onto the body accordingly and secure with
adhesive tape.
– Install screw -1- (1.5 ± 0.2 Nm).
10.1.2 Front wing strip

-D 195 850 A1- .
the front wing panel -2-.
– Apply glass/paint primer -D 822 150 A1- and leave to dry.
10. Trim strips - Scout 285

– Apply adhesive cement -D 172 090 A2- to the front wing panel
in area - 4 -.
– Position the front wing panel and evenly bring to the correct
position.
– Press the wing panel onto the body accordingly and secure
with adhesive tape.
– Install screw -1- (1.5 ± 0.2 Nm).
10.1.3 Rear wing strip

-D 195 850 A1- .
the rear wing panel -1-.
– Apply glass/paint primer -D 822 150 A1- and leave
unlessto dry. by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
authorised
– Apply adhesive cement -D 172 090 A2- to the rear wing panel
in area - 4 -.
– Position the panels at the rear wing panel and bring to the
correct position.
– Press the wing panel onto the body accordingly and secure
with adhesive tape.
– Install expanding rivets -2-.
10.1.4 Removing tuning parts
Note
It is not possible to remove without damaging paint and tuning

parts.
– Before the part is disconnect, heat the connection with hot-air

blower.

– Remove by using commercially available workshop equip‐

ment.
10. Trim strips - Scout 287
11 Letterings
⇒ “11.1 Lettering on radiator grille - SCOUT”, page 288 .
⇒ “11.2 Lettering on radiator grille - RS”, page 289 .
11.1 Lettering on radiator grille - SCOUT
1 - Scout lettering
Install
– Clean and degrease the

adhesive surface with
cleaning agent -D 195
850 A1- .
– Remove the protective

paper from the double-
sided adhesive tape.
– Position at the applica‐

ble point.
– Melt the tabs on the rear

of the lettering.
Removing
– The spoiler cannot be

removed using availa‐
ble workshop equip‐
ment without being
damaged.
2 - Double-sided adhesive
tape

11.2 Lettering on radiator grille - RS
1 - RS lettering
Install
– Clean and degrease the

adhesive surface with
cleaning agent -D 195
850 A1- .
– Remove the protective

paper from the double-
sided adhesive tape.
– Position at the applica‐

ble point.
– Melt the tabs on the rear

of the lettering.
Removing
– The spoiler cannot be

removed using availa‐
ble workshop equip‐
ment without being
damaged.
2 - Double-sided adhesive
tape
11. Letterings 289

12 Anti-chip protective film

Gluing on the film
– The processing temperature must be approx. 21 °C.
– Clean and degrease adhesive surfaces with cleaning solution
-D 195 850 A1- .
– If there are residues of old adhesive on the body, use the ad‐
hesive remover -D 002 000 10- .
– Moisten the applicable area of the body with a detergent sol‐
ution.
– Remove the protective paper off the film -1- only briefly before
gluing it onto the body.
– Stick on the foil gradually and press out the air bubbles using
a scraper.
Removing
– Before removing the film, heat the film with a hot-air blower.
– Carefully pull off the film.

68 – Interior equipment
1 Interior rear-view mirror
⇒ “1.1 Tools”, page 291
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing the interior rear-view mirror”, page
291
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing the interior mirror with rain sen‐
sor”, page 292
⇒ “1.4 Interior mirror with rain sensor and camera - Summary of
components ”, page 295
⇒ “1.5 Removing and installing the interior mirror with rain sensor
and camera”, page 295
⇒ “1.6 Glueing the retaining plate for the interior rear-view mirror”,
page 298
1.1 Tools
♦ Disassembly wedge - 3409-
1.2 Removing and installing the interior

rear-view mirror
Removing
– byTurn
Protected interior
copyright. Copyingmirror -2-
for private by 90° in
or commercial -direction
purposes, ofinarrow-
in part or and
whole, is not re‐
permitted
move from the retaining plate -1-.
1. Interior rear-view mirror 291

Install
1.3 Removing and installing the interior mir‐

ror with rain sensor
Removing
– Fold the mirror down up to stop, approx. 25°.
292 Rep. gr.68 - Interior equipment

– Pull rear cover - 2 - down in - direction of arrow - at he same

time release the locking device - 1 - with a screwdriver or sim‐
ilar.
– Suspend read cover and remove.
– Carefully suspend the stops - arrows - pull down the front cover
- 1 - from the guides on the retaining plate for the interior mirror
- 2 -.

– Turn the interior mirror - 1 - counter clockwise by 40°

- arrow - and remove downwards.
– Disconnect the plug connection in the inner mirror, where

available.
Install

1.4 Interior mirror with rain sensor and camera - Summary of components
1 - Interior rear-view mirror

2 - Camera cover
3 - Cover for interior mirror
mount
1.5 Removing and installing the interior mir‐

ror with rain sensor and camera
Removing
– Insert unlocking tool - T30098- - 2 - in the gap between covers
and press in the catch - A -.

– Remove cover - 1 - in direction of arrow - B - downwards.

– Insert the unlocking tool - T30098- - 1 - in the gap between the
covers on the other side and press in the catch.
– Remove cover -2-. Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Remove camera cover - 1 - from the retaining
with respect plateofininformation
to the correctness directionin this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
of arrow - A - and remove in direction of arrow - B -.

– Use the open-end wrench - 3 - to turn the interior mirror - 2 -

anti-clockwise by 20° - arrow - and remove downwards.
– Disconnect plug connection at interior mirror.

Install

1.6 Glueing the retaining plate for the interi‐

or rear-view mirror
Materials
♦ Glass-metal adhesive kit - D 000 703 A1-
Tools
1 - Glass scraper (commercially available)
2 - Blade (commercially available)
Install
– Remove retaining plate from mirror pedestal.
– Remove PUR adhesive kit from the retaining plate with a wire
brush.
– Grind down the three distance knobs on the adherend. Place
abrasive paper (grain 360/400) on a flat surface.
– Sanded surfaces must be clean and free from grease.
– Using the glass scraper, scrape the old PUR adhesive and
glass/paint primer residues down to the ceramic layer on the
windscreen.
– Clean the bonding surface with glue remover - D 002 000 10-
or cleaning solution - D 009 401 04- .
Caution
Do not damage the ceramic layer. Scratches remain visible.
– Cut a piece of nylon net fabric to the exact size of the retaining
plate.
Note
A protective glove (rubber) must be worn.
– Apply adhesive evenly on the retaining plate.

– Fit a piece of nylon net fabric onto the retaining plate.
– Continue applying adhesive by dabbing on the nylon net fab‐
ric.
Once the nylon net fabric is placed on the adhesive, you only have
30 seconds to press it onto the windscreen.
– Press the retaining plate steadily onto the windscreen for 15
seconds (do not force).
– Remove excess adhesive with a cloth.
Note
Install the interior rear-view mirror after 15 minutes.

2 Covers, storage areas and trim pan‐

els
⇒ “2.1 Tools”, page 299
⇒ “2.2 Summary of components - Centre console”, page 299
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing centre console without armrest”,
page 301
⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing centre console with armrest”, page
302
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing the bracket of the centre console”,
page 307
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing the armrest”, page 308
⇒ “2.7 Summary of components - sun visor”, page 309
⇒ “2.8 Removing and installing the sun visor”, page 310
2.1 Tools
2.2 Summary of components - Centre console

2. Covers, storage areas and trim panels 299

1 - Centre console
2 - Armrest

2.3 Removing and installing centre console without armrest
1 - Trim panel links

2 - Centre console
Removing and installing
⇒ page 301 .
3 - Damping
4 - Cap of handbrake
5 - Screw - 1.5 Nm
6 - Screw - 1.5 Nm
7 - Screw - 1.5 Nm
8 - Trim panel right
9 - Cap
❑ The fixing screw for the
centre console is loca‐
ted under the cap.
10 - Screw - 1.5 Nm
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical components.
– Unscrew
Protected by the screw
copyright. (Pos.
Copying 5) for
for private the trimpurposes,
or commercial panel central
in part or inconsole
whole, is not permitted
inunless
the footwell and detach both trim panels by moving them
downwards.
– Unclip the trim panel for the transmission cover and remove
⇒ Gearbox; Rep. gr. 34 .
– Unclip the cap (Pos. 9) and remove the screw (Pos. 10).
– Apply handbrake fully.
– Unclip the cap on the handbrake (Pos. 4).
– If the console has the Phonebox, disconnect the aerial.
– Partly raise the rear central console, disconnect the plug con‐
nection to the cigar lighter (socket) ⇒ Electrical system- gen‐
eral information ; Rep. gr. 96 .

– Tilt the central console - 1 - rear upwards and unclip out of the
holders for the dash panel - 2 - by pulling it towards the rear.
– If the console has a stowage compartment with cover, discon‐
nect the plug connection for the front glovebox light ⇒ Elec‐
trical system - general information; Rep. gr. 96 .
– Remove centre console from vehicle.
Install
2.4 Removing and installing centre console with armrest
1 - Trim panel links

2 - Centre console
Removing and installing
⇒ page 303 .
3 - Storage tray
Removing
– Remove side trim panel

(Pos. 4).
– Unclip transmission
cover ⇒ transmission;
Rep. gr. 34 .
– Pull off aerial plug from

the right-hand side
through the opening in
the middle console (de‐
pending on the equip‐
ment).
– Unclip the storage tray

in the front area and
move it to the top slight‐
ly.
– Close the for storage

tray and push out to the
front in stages.
– By pushing out the stor‐

age tray in stages, also
open the to expose the
space above the stor‐
age tray.
– After pushing out, re‐

move the glovebox light
connector.
– Remove the storage tray from the central console.
Install

4 - Trim panel right

5 - Screw - 1.5 Nm
6 - Screw - 1.5 Nm
7 - Screw - 1.5 Nm
8 - Cap of handbrake
❑ Clipped onto centre console.
9 - Rear support
Note
The removal of the rear support var‐

ies according to the level of equip‐
ment in the vehicle.
10 - Rear flow vent

❑ Clipped onto the rear support.
11 - Storage tray rear/ashtray
❑ Clipped onto the rear support.
12 - Screw - 1.5 Nm
Removing
Note
The removal of the rear support varies according to the level of

equipment in the vehicle.
– Unclip the rear vent - 1 - from the rear support.

– Remove the complete rear storage tray/ash tray - 2 - thus re‐

moving the cable for the light.
– Remove the switch for the rear seat heater ⇒ Electric system ;
Rep. gr. 96 .
– Remove the socket housing for the inverter.
– Undo the screw - 1 - for the rear support - 2 - and remove the
support in - direction of arrow - towards the rear.

– Remove the detention ring and undo the socket (230 V) from
the rear support ⇒ Electrical system - general information;
Rep. gr. 96 .
– Unscrew the screw - 5 - for the trim panel central console in
the footwell and detach both trim panels by moving them
downwards.

– Unclip the trim panel for the transmission cover and remove
⇒ Gearbox; Rep. gr. 34 .
– If the console has the Phonebox, disconnect the aerial ⇒
Electrical system - general information; Rep. gr. 96 .
– Partly raise the rear central console, disconnect the plug con‐
nection to the cigar lighter (12 V socket) ⇒ Electrical system-
general information ; Rep. gr. 96 .
– Apply handbrake fully.
– Unclip the collar for the handbrake - 8 - from the central con‐
sole.
– Tilt the central console - 1 - rear upwards and
unlessunclip out
authorised by of theAUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
ŠKODA
holders for the dash panel - 2 - by pulling it towards the rear.

– If the console has a stowage compartment with cover, discon‐

nect the plug connection for the front glovebox light ⇒ Elec‐
trical system - general information; Rep. gr. 96 .
– Remove centre console from vehicle.
Install
2.5 Removing and installing the bracket of

the centre console
Removing
– Removing the centre console

– Remove nuts (Pos. 2).
– Where fitted, unclip the clips for the Kessy aerial - 3 - ⇒ Elec‐
trical system - general information ; Rep. gr. 96 .
– Remove the bracket (Pos. 1) from the vehicle.
Install
2.6 Removing and installing the armrest

Removing
⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing centre console with armrest”,
page 302 .
Vehicle with inverter 230 V
– Unscrew the screws - 2 -, disconnect the plug connection and
remove the inverter - 1 - ⇒ Electrical system - information ;
Rep. gr. 96 .
Continued for all vehicles

– Remove armrest - 1 -.
Install
– Mount the armrest - 1 - and partially tighten the screws - 2 -.
– Insert the central console but do not install the securing bolts
yet
page 302 .
– Press the armrest together with the central console and tighten
the rear screws - 2 - for the armrest (2.3 Nm).
– Lift the central console and tighten the front screws - 2 - for the
armrest.
Vehicle with inverter 230 V
– Plug the plug connection for the inverter and secure the in‐
verter with screws (1.5 Nm) ⇒ Electrical system - general
information ; Rep. gr. 96 .
– End installation of the central console
page 302 .
2.7 Summary of components - sun visor

1 - Mounting bracket for right

sun visor
2 - Disassemble cap for mount‐
ing bracket for sun visor
3 - Sun visor
4 - Securing clip for mounting
bracket for sun visor left
5 - Caps for mounting bracket
for sun visor left
2.8 Removing and installing the sun visor

♦ Release pliers - VAS 6427-
Removing
– Fold sun visor forwards.

– Unhook sun visor -2- from centre retainers -1-.

– Swivel out cover caps -3- on sun visor retainer.
Note
In the following steps, make absolutely sure that the release pliers
- VAS 6427- are inserted in the centre of the clip.
– Use the release pliers - VAS 6427- to unlock the front clip -3-
on the sun visor retainer -1- from the support in the body.
– Keep the sun visor taut to avoid the clip locking again unin‐
tentionally.
– Use the release pliers - VAS 6427-
Protected to unlock
by copyright. Copyingthe rear orclip
for private -3- purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
commercial
on the sun visor retainer -1- from the support in the body.
– Carefully take the sun visor -2- with the sun visor retainer -3-
downwards out of the support in the body and remove the
transport retainer.
Install
Note
Before installation, check the clip connections for damage and

replace if necessary.
– Clip the front clips on the sun visor retainer into the support in
the body.
– Clip the rear clips on the sun visor retainer into the support in
the body.
– Check that both clips are fully engaged in the body.

3 Recessed handles
⇒ “3.1 Removing and installing the recessed handles of the roof”,
page 312
3.1 Removing and installing the recessed

handles of the roof
Removing
♦ Release tool - T10517- -T10518- or -T10518A-
– Fold down the recessed handle - 1 - and remove both spreader

clips - 2 - in -direction of arrow-.
– Unlock the clips -arrows- using e.g. the release tool - T10517-
and detach the recessed handle from the supports.

Install
– Press the recessed handle -1- into openings until the mounts
audibly click into place.
– Press in the spreader clips -2-.
3. Recessed handles 313

4 Bearing bolt
⇒ “4.1 Bearing bolt, left-hand drive - Summary of components ”,
page 314
⇒ “4.2 Bearing bolt, right-hand drive - Summary of components”,
page 315
⇒ “4.3 Removing and installing bearing bolt, left-hand drive”, page
315
⇒ “4.4 Removing and installing bearing bolt, right-hand drive”,
page 316
4.1 Bearing bolt, left-hand drive - Summary of components
1 - Bearing bolt
stalling bearing bolt, left-
hand drive”, page 315 .
2 - Nut
❑ 2 Nm
3 - Support
stalling bearing bolt, left-
hand drive”, page 315 .
4 - Floor covering

4.2 Bearing bolt, right-hand drive - Summary of components
1 - Bearing bolt
stalling bearing bolt,
right-hand drive”,
page 316 .
2 - Screw
❑ 2 Nm
3 - Nut
❑ 2 Nm
4 - Support
stalling bearing bolt,
right-hand drive”,
page 316 .
5 - Floor covering
4.3 Removing and installing bearing bolt,

left-hand drive
4. Bearing bolt 315

Removing
– Remove bottom trim panel of pillar A on the driver's side
⇒ “3.2 Removing and installing bottom trim panel of pillar A on
the driver's side”, page 405 .
– Unlock catches - 1 -, press bearing bolt - 2 - with e.g. disas‐
sembly wedge - 3409- - arrows - and remove.
– Press floor covering in region of screw connections to one side

and remove nuts - arrows -.
– Pry mounting bracket - 1 - from threaded bolts and pull out
underneath floor covering.
Install
Note
Before the installation, check all the clip connections for damage
and replace if necessary.
4.4 Removing and installing bearing bolt,

right-hand drive
Removing
– Move bearing bolt - 2 - upwards in - direction of arrow - and
remove.

– Press floor covering in region of screw connections to one side

and remove nuts - arrows -.
– Prise out the mounting bracket -1- from the threaded bolts and
remove.
Install
Note
Before the installation, check all the clip connections for damage
and replace if necessary.
4. Bearing bolt 317

69 – Passenger protection
1 Inspect seat belts
⇒ “1.1 Test sequence”, page 318
⇒ “1.2 Special instructions for the belt tensioner”, page 321
⇒ “1.3 Storage, transport and disposal of airbag, belt tensioner
and battery separation and actuator units (pyrotechnical compo‐
nents)”, page 322
WARNING
The seat belt system must be inspected systematically after

every accident! If one of the inspection points reveals any
damage inform the customer that the seat belts must be re‐
placed.
Test sequence
♦ Check seat belt.
♦ Check automatic belt retractor - locking effect.
♦ Seat belt buckle - visual inspection
♦ Seat belt buckle - functional check
♦ Check deflection fittings and buckle latch
♦ Checking fixingings and fixing points
1.1 Test sequence
1.1.1 Checking the seat belt

– Completely unreel the seat belt from the automatic belt retrac‐
tor or from the lap belt adjusting strip.
– Check the seat belt for dirt, if necessary wash it with mild soapy
water ⇒ Owner's manual . Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
318 Rep. gr.69 - Passenger protection

• If damage is detected (case 1 and 2) on a vehicle which has

been involved in an accident (as shown below) - replace the
seat belt together with the belt buckle.
• If damage is detected on a vehicle which has not been involved
in an accident, as shown under point 1, 2, 3 and/or 4, it is only
necessary to exchange the damaged seat belt.
• Seat belt cut, torn or chafed.
• Torn fraying on the edge of the belt.
• Cigarette burns.
• Belt edge deformed or warped.
1.1.2 Check automatic belt retractor - locking

effect.
The automatic belt retractor has 2 locking functions.
♦ The first locking function is activated when the belt is drawn
rapidly out of the automatic belt retractor (belt withdrawal ac‐
celeration).
Checking
– Draw the seat belt out of the automatic belt retractor with a
sudden sharp pull.
• No locking effect - replace seat belt together with buckle.
• First check whether the belt feeds out and retracts smoothly,
and whether the position of the inertia reel has changed.
• The second locking function is activated by a change in the
vehicle's motion (vehicle-dependent locking function). Thus,
the vehicle must be moved on a level surface.
Checking
– Put on seat belt.
1. Inspect seat belts 319

– Accelerate to 20 km/h and perform a full brake with the brake

pedal.
• If the locking mechanism does not lock the belt when the
brakes are applied, replace the seat belt together with the
buckle.
WARNING
For safety reasons, carry out this test on a section of road with
no traffic so as not to endanger other road users.
1.1.3 Seat belt buckle - visual inspection

– Check belt buckle for fractures and flaking.
• In case of damage, the seat belt and the belt buckle must be
replaced.
1.1.4 Seat belt buckle - functional check

Checking seat belt buckle:
– Insert buckle latch in the belt buckle until there is an audible
click. Check whether the locking mechanism engages, by tug‐
ging forcefully on the seat belt.
• If the buckle latch fails to lock into the buckle even once out of
at least five tests, replace the seat belt together with the buck‐
le.
Check buckle release:
– Release seat belt by pressing the seat belt buckle button.
– If the belt is loose, the latch must eject independently from the
belt buckle.
• Test at least 5 times. If the buckle latch fails to eject even once,
replace the seat belt together with the buckle.
WARNING
Never use lubricants to eliminate noises or to smoothen the

operation of the buttons on seat buckles.
1.1.5 Check deflection fittings and buckle

latch
When the belt system is burdened (seat belt attached in an acci‐
dent) plastic-coated fittings will display fine parallel score marks.
(Normal wear and tear due to frequent use is recognisable by
smooth, even wear, without scoring.)
– Check the plastic for deformation, flakings and crackings.
• In the event of scoring and/or damage replace seat belt to‐
gether with buckle.
1.1.6 Checking fixings and fixing points

♦ Buckle tongue deformed (stretched).
♦ Fixing points (seat, pillar, underfloor) warped, or thread dam‐
aged.
• If the parts are damaged replace seat belt together with buck‐
le.

• Replace fixing points.
Note
If there is damage not due to an accident, for example normal

wear and tear, it is only necessary to replace the damaged part.
1.2 Special instructions for the belt tension‐

er
WARNING
♦ The open end of a belt tensioner must never be pointed

towards people.
♦ Handle the seat belt tensioner units with great care when
removing and installing. A high risk and injury potential
exists through rough improper handling of seat belt ten‐
sioner units.
♦ When connecting the seat belt tensioner units, all me‐
chanical parts including the parts of the three point seat
belt, must be correctly secured. If it is not possible to con‐
nect the seat belt tensioner unit because there is not
enough space, the seal belt must be fully rolled up before
connecting. In this case, there is no increased safety risk
if further safety measures are observed and respected.
These include mainly disconnecting the battery and the
electrostatic discharge of the mechanic before connecting
the seat belt tensioner unit.
♦ Depending on the accident, it may be possible that the belt
tensioner was ignited, the belt force limiter, however, was
NOT ignited. These components are handled in the same
way as non-ignited components!
♦ The control unit for the airbag can be used repeatedly after
activating the belt tensioner, but only up to 3 times
⇒ “5.1 Airbag control unit - Summary of components ”,
page 377 .
1. Inspect seat belts 321

1.3 Storage, transport and disposal of air‐

bag, belt tensioner and battery separa‐
tion and actuator units (pyrotechnical
components)
WARNING
♦ The storage is subject to the respective national legisla‐

tion.
♦ The transport is subject to national and international leg‐
islation, in which packaging, marking, labeling, and ac‐
companying documents are regulated in detail.
♦ Non-ignited pyrotechnical components must be discarded
in the original packaging in compliance with the applicable
disposal procedure according to the national legislation!
In case you have any questions, please contact your im‐
porter.
♦ Only fully ignited pyrotechnical components may be dis‐
posed of as industrial waste.

2 Seat belts
⇒ “2.1 Summary of components - three-point seatbelt front”, page
323
⇒ “2.2 Summary of components - rear outer three-point seat belt”,
page 325
⇒ “2.3 Summary of components - rear middle three-point seat
belt”, page 327
⇒ “2.4 Summary of components - belt buckle front”, page 328
⇒ “2.5 Summary of components - belt buckle rear”, page 329
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing the front three-point seat belt”,
page 330
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing the rear outer three-point seat
belt”, page 332
⇒ “2.8 Removing and installing the rear middle three-point seat
belt”, page 334
⇒ “2.9 Removing and installing front belt guide”, page 335
⇒ “2.10 Removing and installing front belt end fitting”, page 335
⇒ “2.11 Removing and installing the outer rear belt end fitting”,
page 336
⇒ “2.12 Removing and installing the seat belt height adjustment”,
page 336
⇒ “2.13 Removing and installing the front seat belt buckle”, page
338
⇒ “2.14 Removing and installing the rear seat belt buckle”,
page 339
2.1 Summary of components - three-point seatbelt front
2. Seat belts 323

1 - Screw
❑ After an accident with
the seat belt fastened,
replace the bolt.
❑ 40 Nm
2 - Belt end fitting
installing front belt end
fitting”, page 335 .
3 - Screws
❑ 4.5 Nm
4 - Front belt guide
stalling front belt guide”,
page 335 .
❑ During installation, note
the correct fitting posi‐
tion.
5 - Screw
replace the bolt.
❑ 40 Nm
6 - Guide deflection fitting
❑ After tightening the bolt,
it should be able to
move freely.
7 - Screw
replace the bolt.
❑ 20 Nm
8 - Seat belt height adjuster
❑ removing and installing ⇒ “2.12 Removing and installing the seat belt height adjustment”, page 336 .
❑ always replace after activating the belt tensioner
9 - Automatic belt retractor
❑ Driver's side: with ignition 1 for belt tensioner driver's side and control unit for front left tensioner control
unit .
❑ Front passenger side: with ignition 1 for belt tensioner front passenger side and control unit for front right
belt tensioner .
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing the front three-point seat belt”, page 330 .
❑ With the Pre-Crash Basic (PCB) function- pre-tensioning reversible seatbelts.
10 - Screw
❑ After an accident with the seat belt fastened, replace the bolt.
❑ 40 Nm

2.2 Summary of components - rear outer

three-point seat belt
2.2.1 Summary of components - rear outer three-point seat belt, without belt ten‐
sioner

⇒ “2.7.1 Removing and
installing the rear outer
without belt tensioner”,
page 332 .
2 - Screw
replace the bolt.
❑ 40 Nm
3 - Screw
replace the bolt.
❑ 40 Nm
4 - Remove rear outer belt end
fitting
⇒ “2.11byRemoving
unless authorised ŠKODA AUTO A. andS. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
installing
with respect the outer
to the correctness rear
belt end fitting”,
page 336 .
2. Seat belts 325

2.2.2 Summary of components - rear outer three-point seat belt, with belt ten‐
sioner

⇒ “2.7.2 Removing and
installing the rear outer
with belt tensioner”,
page 333 .
2 - Wiring loom
3 - Screw
replace the bolt.
❑ 40 Nm
4 - Screw
replace the bolt.
❑ 40 Nm
5 - Remove rear outer belt end
fitting
installing the outer rear
belt end fitting”,
page 336 .

2.3 Summary of components - rear middle three-point seat belt
1 - Belt buckle
❑ With belt switch at rear
on front passenger side
- E259- .
installing the rear seat
belt buckle”, page 339 .
❑ Always replace after ac‐
tivating the belt tension‐
er with the seatbelt fas‐
tened.
❑ Must rest against the
stop when the nuts are
tightened.
2 - Nut
40 Nm.
3 - Nut
replace nuts.
❑ Tightening
unlesstorque:
40 Nm. with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
stalling the rear middle
three-point seat belt”,
page 334 .
5 - Rear middle belt guide
❑ When damaged, re‐
place the entire belt
guide.
❑ When replacing, always press the 2 locking bolts towards the inside and remove the belt guide.
❑ When fitting, press until you hear it lock into place.
6 - Rear seat backrest
7 - Rear middle belt end fitting
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.14 Removing and installing the rear seat belt buckle”, page 339 .
2. Seat belts 327

2.4 Summary of components - belt buckle front
1 - Front belt buckle

2 - Front seat
❑ Driver side with driver
side belt buckle .
❑ Driver side with front
passenger side belt
buckle .
stalling front seat”, page
446 .
tened.
3 - Screw
replace the bolt.
❑ 40 Nm

2.5 Summary of components - belt buckle rear
1 - Left double belt buckle

driver's side .
tened.
❑ During installation,
press the belt buckle
against the stop.
stop.
2 - Middle belt buckle
❑ With belt switch rear unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
middle . with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�

tened.
❑ During installation,
press the belt buckle
against the stop.
stop.
3 - Right belt buckle with rear
middle belt end fitting
on front passenger side .
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.14 Removing and installing the rear seat belt buckle”, page 339 .
❑ Always replace after activating the belt tensioner with the seatbelt fastened.
❑ Must rest against the stop when the nuts are tightened.
4 - Nut
❑ After an accident with the seat belt fastened, replace.
❑ 40 Nm
5 - Connector
❑ For rear belt switch front passenger side .
6 - Nut
❑ After an accident with the seat belt fastened, replace.
❑ 40 Nm
7 - Connector
❑ For rear belt switch driver's side and rear belt switch .
2. Seat belts 329

2.6 Removing and installing the front three-

point seat belt
Removing
WARNING
When working on the seatbelts, observe the general safety in‐

structions for working on airbag, belt tensioner and battery
separation units (pyrotechnical components).
⇒ “3.2 Observe the general safety instructions for working on
airbag, belt tensioner and battery separation and actuator units
(pyrotechnical components)”, page 342 .
Observe the special instructions for the belt tensioner
⇒ “1.2 Special instructions for the belt tensioner”, page 321 .

– Remove the trim panels of the B pillars
⇒ “3.4 Removing and installing top B-pillar trim panel”,
page 408 .
– Remove front belt end fitting
⇒ “2.10 Removing and installing front belt end fitting”,
page 335 .
– Remove front belt guide
⇒ “2.9 Removing and installing front belt guide”, page 335 .
– Remove guide deflection fitting -2- with seat belt.
WARNING
When electrostatic discharges occur, there is a risk of the belt

tensioners being activated unintentionally. Therefore, the me‐
chanic must discharge himself electrostatically before sepa‐
rating the ignition and earth lead. This occurs, for example, by
briefly touching the body or the door closing wedge.

– Unlock the plug fuse with a small screwdriver - arrow -, dis‐

connect the plug connection for ignition 1 for the belt tensioner
Pos. -1 -.
– Unscrew screw - 3 - and remove automatic belt retractor
- 2 - from the mount.
Install
WARNING

separation units (pyrotechnical components). ⇒ page 342 .
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the

following points:
– When parts of the seatbelt are removed due to an accident,
the seatbelt screws will need to be replaced.
Note
Make sure the plug connection is plugged in as far as it can go

and audibly clicks into place.
– Insert the automatic belt retractor - 1 - into the mount - 2 -
- arrow - and tighten the screw.
2. Seat belts 331

– Insert plug connection - 1 - to ignition arrow - A -.

– Press the plug fuse - 2 - towards the inside -arrow B-, the plug
connection is plugged into the ignition as far as it can go and
is locked into place at the same time.
Caution
The battery must be connected to the terminals when the ig‐

nition is switched on. In case of improper repair of pyrotechni‐
cal components (such as airbag, belt tensioner) unwanted
deployments may occur after connecting the battery.
Nobody should be inside the vehicle when the battery is being
connected.
Work procedure for connecting the battery ⇒ Electrical system;
Rep. gr. 27 ; Disconnecting and re-connecting the battery .
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “2.1 Summary of components - three-point seatbelt front”,
page 323 .
2.7 Removing and installing the rear outer

2.7.1 Removing and installing the rear outer

three-point seat belt without belt ten‐
sioner
Removing
– Remove the seat bench
⇒ “2.1 Removing and installing the rear seat bench”,
page 466 .
– Remove the backrest depending on the vehicle equipment
⇒ “3 Removing and installing backrests”, page 469 .
– Remove top part of side luggage compartment trim panel
⇒ “7.3 Removing and installing top part of side luggage com‐
partment trim panel”, page 427 .
– Remove outer rear belt end fitting
page 336 .
– Remove automatic belt retractor - 2 by
unless authorised - from
ŠKODAthe AUTOmount.
A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
Install
following points:
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “2.2.1 Summary of components - rear outer three-point seat
belt, without belt tensioner”, page 325 .

2.7.2 Removing and installing the rear outer

three-point seat belt with belt tensioner
Removing
WARNING


page 466 .
– Remove the backrest depending on the vehicle equipment
– Remove outer rear belt end fitting
page 336 .
WARNING
When electrostatic discharges occur, there is a risk of the air‐

bag being activated unintentionally. Therefore, the mechanic
must discharge himself electrostatically before separating the
ignition and earth lead. This occurs, for example, by briefly
touching the body or the door lock.
2. Seat belts 333

– Disconnect the electrical wiring harness and remove plug con‐

nector - 1 -.
– Remove automatic belt retractor - 3 - from the mount.
Install
WARNING


following points:
Note

WARNING
The battery must be connected to the terminals when the ig‐

nition is switched on. In case of improper repair of pyrotechni‐
cal components (such as airbag, belt tensioner) unwanted
deployments may occur after connecting the battery.
Nobody should be inside the vehicle when the battery is being
connected.
Work procedure for connecting the battery ⇒ Electrical system;
Rep. gr. 27 ; Disconnecting and re-connecting the battery .
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “2.2.2 Summary of components - rear outer three-point seat
belt, with belt tensioner”, page 326
2.8 Removing and installing the rear middle

Removing
page 466 . Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Remove the rear middle belt bucklewith respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
⇒ “2.14 Removing and installing the rear seat belt buckle”,
page 339 .

– Remove the backrest

– Remove cover from backrest
⇒ “2 Rear covers and seat upholstery”, page 490 .
– Remove nut -1-.
– Suspend automatic belt retractor - 2 - and remove.
– Guide out the seat belt - 3 -.
Install
the securing screws on the seatbelt will need to be replaced.
– Insert the three-point seat belt with anti-rotation mechanism
into the mount and tighten the nut.
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “2.3 Summary of components - rear middle three-point seat
belt”, page 327 .
2.9 Removing and installing front belt guide

Removing
– Remove bottom trim panel of B pillar
page 409 .
– Unscrew screws -2- and remove the belt guide -1-.
Install
Installation
unless is carried
authorised out inAUTO
by ŠKODA the A.reverse
S. ŠKODAorder.
AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
Note
During installation, note the correct fitting position of the belt

guide.
Tightening torques
page 323
2.10 Removing and installing front belt end

fitting
Removing
• The front seat is positioned as far forward as possible and at
the highest seating position.
– Remove bottom trim panel of B pillar
page 409 .
2. Seat belts 335

– Unscrew screw -1- and loosen the belt end fitting -2- from the
body.
Install
Tightening torques
page 323
2.11 Removing and installing the outer rear

belt end fitting
Removing
– Remove the wheel house trim from the C pillar
⇒ “3.8 Removing and installing the wheel house trim on the C
pillar”, page 413 .
– Unscrew the screw - 1 - from the belt end fitting - 2-.
Install
• The anti-rotation mechanism - arrow - at the bottom plate must

lie in the recess of the belt end fitting - 2 -.
– Tighten the belt
Protected end fitting
by copyright. Copying -for2private
- with the screw
or commercial - 1 -.in part or in whole, is not permitted
purposes,
– Attach the wheel
with respect house
to the trimoftoinformation
correctness the wheel house trim
in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “2.2 Summary of components - rear outer three-point seat
belt”, page 325
2.12 Removing and installing the seat belt

height adjustment
Removing
– Press the button for the seat belt height adjustment and adjust
the slider for the seat belt height adjustment to the lowest po‐
sition.
– Remove top trim panel of B pillar
page 408 .
– Lay the top B-pillar trim panel with the retracted belt to the side.


– Remove guide deflection fitting -1- with seat belt.
– Remove the seat belt height adjustment - 2 - from the B-pillar
upwards from the B pillar.
Install
following points:
Note
♦ The seat belt height adjustment is provided as a spare part

with slider seat belt heat adjustment in the lowest locking po‐
sition (fitting position).
♦ If the removed seat belt height adjustment units are reinstal‐
led, they must be put into the deepest position (fitting position).
– Suspend the seat belt height adjustment - 2 - in the B pillar.

– Tighten screw -3-.
– Install the guide deflection fitting -1- and tighten the screw
-4-.
Note unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
The button for seat belt height adjustment must not be pressed
when installing the B pillar trim.
– Firstly, insert the top B pillar trim panel - 3 - upwards.

• The mount - 2 - of the slider part of the top B pillar trim panel
must be locked in the locking pin - 1 - for the seat belt height
adjustment - arrow -.
– Seat belt height adjustment as spare part: After installing the
B pillar trim, press the slider upwards forcefully.
• This releases the equipment mounting for the seat belt height
adjustment unit.
– Carry out a function test - the following functions must be met:
• The seat belt height adjustment must audibly click into place
into each of 3 possible positions (in the highest position too).
• The button for the seat belt height adjustment must automat‐
ically return to the top position after being pressed irrespective
of how.
• Guide deflection fitting must be able to move freely after the
screw is tightened.
If one of the above functions is not met, check the fitting of the
seat belt height adjustment- the seat belt height adjustment unit
may need to be replaced.
Tightening torques
page 323
2. Seat belts 337

2.13 Removing and installing the front seat

belt buckle
Removing
– Remove front seat
⇒ “1.1 Removing and installing front seat”, page 446 .
– Disconnect the plug connection for the belt buckle from the
coupling station underneath the seat rack.
– Undo the electrical cable from the seat rack.
– Unscrew the screw - 3 -, remove belt buckle - 1 - from the seat
- 2 -.
Install
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay
Protected attention
by copyright. to the
following points: unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability

– Insert belt buckle - 2 - so that the recess arrow - B - overlaps

with the peg arrow - A - on the seat rack - 1 -.
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “2.4 Summary of components - belt buckle front”,
page 328
2.14 Removing and installing the rear seat

belt buckle
Removing
Right - belt buckle with belt end fitting:
Note
Belt buckle with belt end fitting is a component part of the rear
middle seatbelt.

page 466 .
– Disconnect the plug connection - 2 - for the belt switch.
– Remove nut -1-.
– Remove the belt buckle - 3 - with belt end fitting.
Left - double belt buckle

– Disconnect the plug connection - 3 - for the belt switch.
– Remove nut - 2 -.
– Remove the double belt buckle - 1 -.
Install
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “2.5 Summary of components - belt buckle rear”, page 329
2. Seat belts 339

3 Airbags
⇒ “3.1 Tools”, page 340
⇒ “3.2 Observe the general safety instructions for working on air‐
bag, belt tensioner and battery separation and actuator units
(pyrotechnical components)”, page 342
⇒ “3.3 Special instructions for driver and front passenger airbag”,
page 343
⇒ “3.4 Additional safety instructions for side airbag”, page 343
⇒ “3.5 Additional safety instructions for head airbag”, page 344
⇒ “3.6 Safety instructions for crash sensors (pressure sensors)
for front side airbag”, page 344
⇒ “3.7 Storage, transport and disposal of airbag, belt tensioner
and battery separation and actuator units (pyrotechnical compo‐
nents)”, page 345
⇒ “3.8 Replacing airbag units following an accident”, page 345
⇒ “3.9 Overview of fitting locations - airbag”, page 347
⇒ “3.10 Summary of components of steering wheel”, page 349
⇒ “3.11 Summary of components - Airbag on driver side”,
page 350
⇒ “3.12 Removing and installing airbag unit with ignition for airbag
driver's side ”, page 351
⇒ “3.13 Replacing the connection line in the airbag”, page 353
⇒ “3.14 Summary of components - Airbag on front passenger
side”, page 354
⇒ “3.15 Removing and installing airbag unit front passenger side
with ignition 1 for airbag front passenger side ”, page 355
⇒ “3.16 Removing and installing key-operated switch for deacti‐
vating the front passenger side airbag”, page 357
⇒ “3.17 Summary of components - side airbags front”,
page 357
⇒ “3.18 Summary of components - side airbag rear”, page 359
⇒ “3.19 Removing and installing side airbag front with ignition for
side airbag ”, page 359
⇒ “3.20 Rear side airbag with ignition device for side airbag rear
”, page 360
⇒ “3.21 Removing and installing the warning light for front pas‐
senger side airbag off ”, page 361
⇒ “3.22 unless
Summary ofbycomponents
authorised - head
ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA airbag”, page
AUTO A. S. does not 361
guarantee or accept any liability
⇒ “3.23 Removing and installing head airbag with ignition for head
airbag driver's side ”, page 362
⇒ “3.24 Summary of components - knee airbag”, page 365
⇒ “3.25 Removing and installing knee airbag with ignition for knee
airbag driver's side ”, page 366
⇒ “3.26 After replacement, configure the control unit”, page 367
3.1 Tools

♦ Vehicle diagnosis, measurement and information system -

VAS/ODIS-
3. Airbags 341
3.2 Observe the general safety instructions

for working on airbag, belt tensioner and
battery separation and actuator units
(pyrotechnical components)
WARNING
♦ The fuel contained in pyrotechnical components is

burned, which produces gases. Furthermore, certain em‐
bodiments contain compressed gas which is used for the
gas production.
♦ This compressed gas is stored in a highly pressurised
pressure gas tank.
♦ The ignition of pyrotechnical components is carried out by
means of electrical/mechanical igniters.
♦ Inspection, removal and installation and repair work must
only be carried out by properly qualified personnel.
♦ There are no change intervals for the airbag units.
♦ Under no circumstances use a test lamp, voltmeter or
ohmmeter for testing.
♦ Pyrotechnical components should only be checked when
installed and with a manufacturer-specified vehicle diag‐
nosis, measurement and information system.
♦ When working on pyrotechnical components and on the
airbag control unit - J234- , the earth strap of the battery
must be disconnected once the ignition is switched on.
Subsequently cover the negative terminal.
♦ After disconnecting the battery it is essential to wait 10
seconds.
♦ SWITCH ON the ignition before connecting the battery.
Nobody should be in the vehicle when the battery is con‐
nected. Exception: vehicles with the battery located in the
vehicle interior. In this case, you must not be in the range
of influence of the airbags and seat belts.
♦ If the vehicle is equipped with the Kessy system, the igni‐
tion should only be switched on after connecting the bat‐
tery using the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester outside the
vehicle cockpit (the valid ignition key must be inside the
vehicle) for safety reasons. This procedure is part of the
test in the targeted fault finding.
♦ Wash your hands after touching the ignited pyrotechnical
components of the restraint system.
♦ Pyrotechnical components must not be opened or re‐
paired; always use new parts (risk of injury).
♦ Pyrotechnical components, unless
which are damaged,
authorised by ŠKODA AUTO must A. S.not
ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
be re-installed. with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
♦ Pyrotechnical components, which have fallen on a hard

surface, must not be re-installed.
♦ Before handling pyrotechnical components of the restraint
system, for example, disconnecting the electrical plug
connection, the mechanic must discharge himself electro‐
statically. The electrostatic discharge is achieved by
touching grounded metal parts, for example, by briefly
touching the door closing wedge.

♦ Pyrotechnical components should be installed immediate‐

ly after being removed from the transport container.
♦ If work is interrupted, place the pyrotechnical components
back in the transport container.
♦ It is not permitted to leave the pyrotechnical component
unattended.
♦ Pyrotechnical components should not be treated with
grease, cleaning agents or similar products.
♦ Pyrotechnical components should not be exposed to tem‐
peratures above 100 °C, not even for short periods.
3.3 Special instructions for driver and front

passenger airbag
WARNING
♦ Driver and front passenger airbag units in an unmounted

condition are to be deposited with the impact absorber to‐
wards the top.
When replacing airbag units, it is absolutely essential to observe

the following sequence:
1- Remove the old airbag unit and put down with the cushion
side facing up.
2- Take the new airbag unit out of the transport container and
put down with the cushion side facing up.
3- Immediately place the old airbag unit in the transport con‐
tainer.
4- Install the new airbag unit in the vehicle.
3.4 Additional safety instructions for side

airbag
♦ On no account fit seat or protective seat covers which have
not been approved for the use on seats with side airbags.
♦ The backrest upholstery must not be cut out in the area of the
side airbag.
♦ When installing, the seam must run completely straight in the
area of the side airbag.
♦ All the upholstery retaining clips must be replaced (metal and
plastic retaining clips).
♦ When installing, all the upholstery retaining clips must be fitted
on in the same place.
♦ In the event of damage to the upholstery (tears, burn holes
etc.) in the area of the side airbag, always replace the uphols‐
tery for safety reasons, otherwise the side airbag cannot prop‐
erly be deployed.
♦ Repairs to the seat backrest cover in the area of the side airbag
must not be carried out (because of the special thread and the
precisely defined seam).
♦ After actuating the side airbag, the seat backrest upholstery
must always be replaced.
3. Airbags 343
♦ All the damaged components must be replaced after an acci‐

dent. If there is no damage to the airbag unit, you can still use
it.
♦ If the side airbag units are replaced, detach the sticker for the
airbag number from the new side airbag unit and stick it over
the old sticker on the seat pan.
♦ Do not prick in the area of the airbag seat occupation sensor
front passenger side and in the cover of the seat occupation
detection mat with the upholstery needle or similar pointed
objects.
3.5 Additional safety instructions for head

airbag
♦ Before each installation, carry out a visual inspection of the
trim panels for damage.
♦ Always replace damaged trim panels of pillars - never try to
mend them.
♦ When installing, make sure the trim panels are firmly seated.
♦ When carrying out repairs behind the airbag, always remove
the entire module.
♦ Handle head airbags very carefully when removing and instal‐
ling to rule out damage.
♦ Place the removed head airbags into the transport container
or on a clean, level surface with a cover underneath.
♦ After making repairs to the body, check the body in the region
of the head airbag for welding splatter, deformations and abra‐
sions (compare opposite sides).
♦ If the gas generator is NOT screwed on, hold it firmly during
the whole work (transport, removal and installation, etc.).
♦ Never turn, wind, kink, throw, hurl, pull, suspend, crush, press,
pinch or clamp the head airbags.
♦ You may fold them when this does not cause any damage
(especially the protective wrapper).
3.6 Safety instructions for crash sensors

(pressure sensors) for front side airbag
The crash sensors for side airbag respond to pressure change
and must therefore be handled very carefully. Pay attention to the
following points: Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
♦ Note the correct fitting position: Assemble
with respect to theonly in the
correctness appro‐ in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
of information
priate fitting position in the door.
♦ Protect the crash sensor against shocks and strikes. Do not
use any crash sensors sender that have been dropped. Re‐
move the crash sensor when carrying out body work repairs
on the door.
♦ The crash sensor is adjusted to the volume of air inside the
door: A deformation of the door which results in a reduction in
the size of the air compartment in the door impairs the crash
sensor.
♦ Avoid major contamination to the crash sensor. Do not use any
compressed air around the crash sensor. Protect the crash
sensor from filing or drilling chips (for example when retrofitting
door loudspeakers). Do not use cavity preservative or spray
oil in the area of the crash sensor.
♦ Prevent the build-up of heat, e.g. during painting or other
bodywork. The crash sensors may be exposed to cold of no

more than -40 ℃ (for example in non-air conditioned aircraft

cargo compartments).
♦ The crash sensor must be protected from moisture during
storage and assembly work.
Ensure tightness of the door after the assembly for smooth oper‐
ation of the crash sensor.
Observe the following points:
♦ All components (for example, cover, loudspeaker, door trim
panel) must be installed correctly.
♦ The retaining clips for the door trim panel seal the system.
Replace the holding clamps when required.
3.7 Storage, transport and disposal of air‐

bag, belt tensioner and battery separa‐
tion and actuator units (pyrotechnical
components)
WARNING
♦ The storage is subject to the respective national legisla‐

tion.
♦ The transport is subject to national and international leg‐
islation, in which packaging, marking, labeling, and ac‐
companying documents are regulated in detail.
♦ Non-ignited pyrotechnical components must be discarded
in the original packaging in compliance with the applicable
disposal procedure according to the national legislation!
In case you have any questions, please contact your im‐
porter.
♦ Only with
fullyrespect
ignited
to the pyrotechnical components
correctness of information may
in this document. be dis‐
Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
posed of as industrial waste.
3.8 Replacing airbag units following an ac‐

cident
Note
“Compulsory registration before repair” - Note regulations regard‐

ing deployment of airbag and non-deployment of airbag in the ⇒
Technical Service Handbook .
ElsaWin ⇒
Technical Service Handbook
Technical product information ⇒
Body/equipment ⇒
Operation ⇒
Occupant protection ⇒
Airbag fire accident (safety relevant inquiry-registration docu‐
ments) ⇒
Systems
3. Airbags 345
3.8.1 Accident with deployment of airbag

The following components must be exchanged after an accident
with deployment of airbag:
♦ Vehicle diagnosis, measurement and information system
VAS/ODIS
The airbag control unit must be replaced
♦ The control unit for the airbag can be used repeatedly after
triggering of the airbag units, but only up to 3 times
page 377 .
♦ If the packaging has been damaged.
♦ If the tunnel is deformed within a range of up to 200 mm around
the control unit.
Always replace
♦ All triggered airbag units.
Additionally when triggering the front passenger's airbag
♦ The dash panel.
♦ Deformed supports onauthorised
front passenger's
by ŠKODA AUTOairbag unitAUTO(they
A. S.are
unless A. S. ŠKODA does not guarantee or accept any liability
not allowed to deform
with backwards)
♦ All sensors for the front airbag on the front of the vehicle.
♦ The remaining lateral acceleration sensors if the attachment
points are deformed in the area of the sensors.
Additionally when triggering the driver's airbag
♦ Return ring with slip ring.
♦ All sensors for the front airbag on the front of the vehicle.
Additionally when triggering the side airbag
♦ Pressure sensors on the triggered side.
♦ Lateral acceleration sensors on the triggered side.
♦ Cover.
♦ If the seat backrest can be folded up: Padding on side (if in‐
stalled).
Additionally
♦ All automatic belt retractors with triggered seat belt tensioners.
♦ All automatic belt retractors with triggered belt force limiters
(depending on equipment).
♦ Belt buckles for all automatic belt retractors with triggered belt
tensioners while seatbelt is fastened.
♦ Seat belt height adjustment (mechanical and electrical) for all
automatic belt retractors with triggered seat belt tensioners
while seatbelt is fastened.

Note
♦ Triggered belt force limiters can be detected according to the

following identifications:
♦ The pin - 1 - and the peg - 3 - protrude from the housing of the
belt force limiter at the automatic belt retractor.
♦ The latch - 2 - is no longer vertical, but points at an angle to
the outside.

– All damaged components must be replaced when necessary
(visual inspection):
– After replacing the airbag units, stick the labels (tear-off strips
only) onto the registration card and send it to the importer for
registration.
3.8.2 Accident without deployment of airbag

♦ If no fault is indicated by the airbag warning light - K75- , it is
not necessary to replace any parts of the airbag system. The
seat belts must be checked separately.
3.8.3 Checking airbag fixing parts after an ac‐

cident
Basically, all damaged fixing parts must be exchanged, no re‐
shaping or »making it fit« of the components is permissible.
Check the following components after each time an airbag is ac‐
tivated.
If a front passenger airbag was deployed
♦ Central pipe for dash panel; the supports for the front passen‐
ger airbag and front passenger airbag unit must be installed
free of stress. Otherwise the central pipe will need to be re‐
placed.
♦ Check the storage tray in the dash panel for damage. Replace
it when the storage tray is damaged in the dash panel.
If a driver's airbag was deployed
♦ replace the steering wheel and place it together with the steer‐
ing ring on a flat surface. The steering ring must lie on the full
surface. Otherwise the steering wheel will need to be replaced.
♦ Check steering wheel for burn marks. If burn marks are
present, the steering wheel must be replaced.
3.9 Overview of fitting locations - airbag
3. Airbags 347
1 - Side airbag front passenger

side
❑ With ignition for side air‐
bag passenger side .
❑ Summary of compo‐
nents
⇒ “3.17 Summary of
components - side air‐
bags front”, page 357 .
2 - Head airbag
❑ With ignition for head
airbag .
nents
components - head air‐
bag”, page 361 .
3 - Side airbag rear front pas‐
senger side
bag rear passenger
side .
nents
bag rear”, page 359 .
4 - Side airbag driver's side
front
bag driver's side .
nents
bags front”, page 357 .
5 - Head airbag driver's side
❑ With ignition for head airbag driver's side .
❑ Summary of components ⇒ “3.22 Summary of components - head airbag”, page 361 .
6 - Side airbag rear driver's side
❑ With ignition for side airbag rear driver's side .
❑ Summary of components
unless authorised⇒by“3.18
ŠKODASummary of components
AUTO A. S. does -notside airbag rear”, page 359 .
AUTO A. S. ŠKODA guarantee or accept any liability
7 - Airbag on driver side
❑ With ignition for airbag driver's side .
❑ Summary of components ⇒ “3.11 Summary of components - Airbag on driver side”, page 350 .
8 - Steering wheel
❑ Summary of components ⇒ “3.10 Summary of components of steering wheel”, page 349 .
9 - Mounting bracket for knee airbag driver's side
❑ Summary of components ⇒ Chassis, axles, steering; Rep. gr. 48 .
10 - Knee airbag driver's side
❑ With ignition for knee airbag driver's side .
❑ Summary of components ⇒ “3.24 Summary of components - knee airbag”, page 365 .
11 - Airbag control unit - J234-
❑ Summary of components ⇒ “5.1 Airbag control unit - Summary of components ”, page 377 .

12 - Key-operated switch for deactivating the front passenger side airbag

⇒ “3.16 Removing and installing key-operated switch for deactivating the front passenger side airbag”,
page 357 .
13 - Airbag front passenger side
❑ With ignition 1 for airbag front passenger side .
❑ Blocking and activation via key switch for deactivation of front passenger side airbag possible.
❑ Summary of components
⇒ “3.14 Summary of components - Airbag on front passenger side”, page 354 .
14 - Warning light for airbag front passenger side off
❑ Not replaceable individually.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr. 96 .
3.10 Summary of components of steering wheel
1 - Steering wheel
Removing
– Remove driver's airbag

unit
⇒ “3.12 Removing and Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
installing airbag unit unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
with ignition for airbag with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
driver's side ”,
page 351 .
– Position the steering

wheel to centre position
(wheels in straighta‐
head position).
– Mark the opposite posi‐

tion of the steering
wheel and the shaft -4-
with a line, as long as
this position is not facto‐
ry-marked.
– Remove the steering

wheel from the steering
column.
Install

2 - 30 Nm + 90°
– Can be used up to five
times, then replace.
– Mark with a dot after

each mounting.
3 - Airbag unit
❑ Summary of components - Airbag on driver side
⇒ “3.11 Summary of components - Airbag on driver side”, page 350 .
3. Airbags 349
4 - Steering wheel shaft
3.11 Summary of components - Airbag on driver side
1 - Steering column electronics

control unit
❑ With coil spring for the
airbag and restoring ring
with slip ring .
nents ⇒ Electrical sys‐
tem; Rep. gr. 94 .
2 - Steering wheel without mul‐
ti-function controls
❑ Equipment variant.
nents
components of steering
wheel”, page 349 .
3 - 30 Nm + 90°
❑ Can be used up to five
times, then replace.
❑ Mark
with with
respect to a dot after
the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
each mounting.
❑ With ignition for airbag
driver's side .
WARNING
When working on the air‐
bags, observe the gen‐
eral safety instructions
for working on airbag,
belt tensioner and bat‐
tery separation units (py‐
rotechnical compo‐
nents).
⇒ “3.2 Observe the gen‐
tery separation and ac‐
tuator units (pyrotechni‐
cal components)”,
page 342 .

⇒ “3.12 Removing and installing airbag unit with ignition for airbag driver's side ”, page 351 .
5 - Steering wheel with multi-function controls
❑ Equipment variant.
❑ The installation and removal is identical with the steering wheel without multi-functional controls, Sum‐
mary of components ⇒ “3.10 Summary of components of steering wheel”, page 349 .
❑ With ignition for airbag driver's side .

WARNING
nents).
cal components)”,
page 342 .

⇒ “3.12 Removing and installing airbag unit with ignition for airbag driver's side ”, page 351 .
7 - Release pin
❑ Unlock. e.g. using a screwdriver.
3.12 Removing and installing airbag unit with

ignition for airbag driver's side
Removing
WARNING
When working on the airbags, observe the general safety in‐

– Disconnect battery earth strap ⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr.

27 .
– Put steering wheel in the lowest position.
– Pull out steering wheel fully up to the limit stop.
– Turn steering wheel until one of the holes -arrows- is located
at the top.
3. Airbags 351
– E.g. using a screwdriver or Torx key (max. overall length of

screwdriver approx. 170 mm, blade width approx. 5 mm), un‐
lock the springs -1 - on the airbag locking mechanism - 2 -.
Note
When unlocking, be careful not to damage the electrical cables.
– Rotate steering wheel by 180 degrees and repeat on the op‐

posite side of the steering wheel.
– Reposition the steering wheel to centre position (wheels in
straightahead position).
– Carefully pull the airbag driver's side - 3 - partially over the

steering wheel.
– Remove the locking mechanism - 2 - - arrow - and push down,
disconnect the plug connection - 1 -.
Equipment variant with multi-function controls:
– Disconnect the plug connection.
Caution
Lay aside the airbag unit in such a way that the impact absorber
points upwards.
Install
following points:
WARNING

Make sure that the cables are not trapped.
– Insert airbag driver's side -1- into the steering wheel position
and with both hands, press onto the borders until it audibly
locks into place - arrows -.
WARNING
Nobody should be in the vehicle when the battery is being

Protected con‐ Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
by copyright.
nected. unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
Pay attention to the sequence when connecting the battery ⇒
Electrical System; Rep. gr. 27 .

3.13 Replacing the connection line in the air‐

bag
Removing
WARNING

– Remove airbag unit driver's side

⇒ “3.12 Removing and installing airbag unit with ignition for
airbag driver's side ”, page 351 .
Equipment version: Steering wheel with multi-function controls
– Unlock locking mechanism -2- with a small screwdriver
-arrow- and remove connector -1- from the ignition for airbag
driver's side .
– Disconnect the plug connection from the wiring harness - 1 -.

– Suspend the wiring harness from the mounting bracket and
remove from the airbag on the driver's side - 2 -.
Install
WARNING Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
3. Airbags 353
– Insert plug connection - 1 - to ignition for airbag arrow - A -.

– Press the plug fuse - 2 - in direction of arrow -B-, the plug
Installation is carried out in the reverse order. When installing,
note the following:
Note
♦ Make sure the plug connection is plugged in as far as it can

go and audibly clicks into place.
♦ Make sure that the cables are not trapped.
3.14 Summary of components - Airbag on front passenger side
1 - Connector
❑ ignition 1 for airbag front
passenger side .
2 - Screws
❑ 7 Nm
3 - Dash panel unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
❑ Replace the dash panel
after the triggering of an
airbag
ponents - dash panel”,
page 384 .
4 - Connector
5 - Screws
❑ 7 Nm
6 - Airbag front passenger side
❑ With ignition 1 for airbag
front passenger side .
WARNING
nents).
cal components)”,
page 342 .
❑ The locking and triggering of an airbag is possible via a key-operated switch.

⇒ “3.15 Removing and installing airbag unit front passenger side with ignition 1 for airbag front passenger
side ”, page 355 .
3.15 Removing and installing airbag unit front

passenger side with ignition 1 for airbag
front passenger side
Removing
WARNING

nical components)
⇒ “3.2 Observe the general safety instructions for working
on airbag, belt tensioner and battery separation and ac‐
tuator units (pyrotechnical components)”, page 342 .
♦ Observe the special instructions for driver and front pas‐
senger airbag
⇒ “3.3 Special instructions for driver and front passenger
airbag”, page 343 .
WARNING
When electrostatic discharges occur, there is a risk of the air‐

bag being activated unintentionally.
Therefore, the mechanic must discharge himself electrostati‐
cally before separating the ignition and earth lead. This occurs,
for example, by briefly touching the body or the door closing
wedge.

– Remove glovebox on front passenger side with support for
glovebox
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing passenger side glove com‐
partment support”, page 391 from the not
dash panel.
unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does guarantee or accept any liability
– Disconnect plug connection - 4 - from ignition 1 for airbag front
passenger side .
3. Airbags 355
– To do so, unlock the locking mechanism - 2 - with a small

screwdriver - arrow - and disconnect the plug connection
- 1 -.
– Remove screws - 2 - (7 Nm) and - 3 - (7 Nm).

– Remove the airbag unit on the front passenger side -1- down
and out of the vehicle.
Caution
points upwards.
Install
following points:
WARNING

– Press the plug fuse - 2 - in direction of arrow -B-, the plug
Note
Before installing the screws, it is essential that you clean the

threads of the screws and nuts in the dash panel.
– Switch on ignition.
WARNING
Make sure no person is present in the vehicle.
– Connect the vehicle battery ⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr. 27 ;

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “3.14 Summary of components - Airbag on front passenger
side”, page 354

3.16 Removing and installing key-operated

switch for deactivating the front passen‐
ger side airbag
WARNING

Removing
– Switch off ignition.
– Remove glovebox on front passenger side with support for
glovebox
partment support”, page 391 from the dash panel.
– Press the detention ring - 1 - in - direction of arrow - until the
plug connection is released.
– Unlock the retaining springs - 3 - and - 5 -.
– Press out the key switch for switching off the airbag - 4 - from
the key-operated housing.
Install
Note

– Make sure that the key switch for deactivation of airbag on

front passenger side clicks audibly into position in the housing.
3.17 Summary of components - side airbags front
3. Airbags 357
1 - Backrest frame
2 - Hook
❑ For attaching side air‐
bag to backrest frame.
3 - Side airbag front
❑ On the driver's side with
ignition for side airbag
driver's side .
❑ On front passenger side
with ignition for side air‐
bag .
WARNING
nents).
cal components)”,
page 342 .
Observe safety instruc‐
tions for safety airbag
⇒ “3.4 Additional safety
instructions for side air‐
bag”, page 343 .

⇒ “3.19 Removing and installing side airbag front with ignition for side airbag ”, page 359 .
4 - Screw
❑ Replace after disassembly.
❑ 8 Nm
5 - Electrical line
❑ Ignition device for side airbag driver's side / ignition device for side airbag front passenger side .

3.18 Summary of components - side airbag rear
1 - Nut
❑ 9 Nm.
2 - Lateral padding
❑ With lateral airbag unit.
3 - Screws
❑ 8 Nm.
❑ Replace after disas‐
sembly.
4 - Side airbag rear
❑ On driver's side with ig‐
nition for side airbag
rear driver's side .
with ignition for side air‐
bag rear front passeng‐
er's side .
⇒ “3.20 Rear side airbag
with ignition device for
side airbag rear ”,
page 360 .
3.19 Removing and installing side airbag

front with ignition for side airbag
Removing
WARNING

Observe safety instructions for safety airbag
⇒ “3.4 Additional safety instructions
Protected by for side
copyright. airbag”,
– Remove front seat and front rest

3. Airbags 359
– Remove the cover and backrest upholstery

⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing the cover and the upholstery
of the front seat cushions”, page 482 .
– Push side airbag - 1 - towards the top and out of seat rest rack.
– Careful undo the mounting bracket for the el. wiring harness
for the side airbag - 3 - from the seat rest.
Install
WARNING

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “3.17 Summary of components - side airbags front”,
page 357
3.20 Rear side airbag with ignition device for

side airbag rear
Removing
WARNING

– Remove rear seat and fold up seat rest.

– Remove lateral padding ⇒ Item 2 (page 359) .
– To do so, remove the nut ⇒ Item 1 (page 359) .
– Remove the lateral padding from the top retaining clip.
– Disconnect airbag unit plug connector ⇒ Item 4 (page 359) .
– Remove the side airbag from the lateral padding.
Install
WARNING



Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “3.18 Summary of components - side airbag rear”,
page 359
3.21 Removing and installing the warning

light for front passenger side airbag off
Removing and installing the warning light for front passenger side
airbag off ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 .
3.22 Summary of components - head airbag
1 - Anti-twist protection line

❑ Used to protect against
twisting.
❑ Must be completely visi‐
ble after fitting.
2 - Head airbag
❑ On the driver's side with
ignition for head airbag
driver's side .
with ignition for head air‐
bag .
WARNING
nents).
⇒ “3.2 Observe the gen‐Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
eral safety instructions with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
cal components)”,
page 342 .
Observe safety instruc‐
tions for head airbag
⇒ “3.5 Additional safety
instructions for head air‐
bag”, page 344 .

⇒ “3.23 Removing and installing head airbag with ignition for head airbag driver's side ”, page 362 .
3 - Screw
❑ Replace after disassembly.
❑ 4 Nm.
4 - Retaining clip
5 - Retaining clip
3. Airbags 361
3.23 Removing and installing head airbag

with ignition for head airbag driver's side
Removing
WARNING

– Remove top trim panels of pillars A, B, C

⇒ “3 Trim panels of pillars”, page 404 .
– Remove moulded headliner (only lower)
page 439 .
– Suspend retaining clips - 1 -, - 2 -, - 3 -, - 4 - and - 5 - from the
body in den securing tabs of the head airbag.
– To do so, slide the unlocking tool - VAS 1978/17- with the
»spoon« - arrow - with feeling straight into the opening -A - up
to the stop, as shown in the figure.
– At the same time, remove the left region of the retaining clip
from the body.
– E.g. remove the unlocking tool - VAS 1978/17- again and
make sure the retaining clip does not engage with the un‐
locked area again.
– E.g. turn the unlocking tool - VAS 1978/17- 180°.
– Repeat the procedure at opening - B -.

– Unclip the holding clamp -1- from the A pillar.
3. Airbags 363
– Remove the fuse and plug - 1 - from the head airbag - 2 -

- arrow -.
– Remove the screw - 3 - from the head airbag.
– First suspend the head airbag - 1 - at the front from the mount
and suspend from the body -arrow B- and push towards the
rear.
– Suspend the head airbag out of the mount on the body arrow
-A - and remove.
Install
WARNING

Always observe the correct sequence when installing.
– First suspend the head airbag - 1 - at the rear in the mount and
suspend from the body - A - and push towards the front.
– Suspend the head airbag front into the mount on the body
-arrow B -.
– Secure the head airbag with the screw - 1 -.

– Rotate the rear-most retaining clip - 1 - downwards by 90°

- arrow - and engage in the body.
– Press in the remaining retaining clips of the head airbag until
they audibly lock into place, beginning at the gas generator
towards the front and rear.
– Carry out a tensile test on the retaining clips and check them
to make sure they are locked completely.
– Plug the connector at the ignition for the head airbag.
– To do so, press in the plug connector fuse - as a result, the
connector is pushed into the cylinder for the head airbag up to
the stop and is latched at the same time.
– Check whether the anti-twist protection line is visible over the
entire length and is straight. This ensures that the airbag is
NOT twisted.
WARNING

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “3.22 Summary of components - head airbag”, page 361
3.24 Summary of components - knee airbag
3. Airbags 365
1 - Knee airbag with ignition for

knee airbag driver's side
installing knee airbag
with ignition for knee air‐
bag driver's side ”, page
366 .
WARNING
Make sure that the sur‐
face of the knee airbag
cannot be damaged by
mechanical loads.
After
♦ completing the
work, carry out a visual
inspection to see wheth‐
er the surface is not dam‐
aged, especially in the
perforation region.
2 - Connection point of screws

❑ For knee airbag.
WARNING
Exclude functional im‐
pairments through an in‐
adequate ground con‐
nection. Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
The
♦ threads and contact with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
surfaces must be free of
paint, coatings and corro‐
sion.
The
♦ screw connection
acts as a ground connec‐
tion for the knee airbag.
3 - Screw
❑ 18 Nm
4 - Connector
❑ For ignition for knee airbag driver's side .
3.25 Removing and installing knee airbag

with ignition for knee airbag driver's side
Removing
WARNING



– Remove the knee airbag driver's side - 1 - towards the rear.
– Disconnect plug connection - 3 - at the ignition for knee airbag
driver's side .
– To do so, unlock the locking mechanism - 4 - with a small
screwdriver - arrow - and remove the plug connection.
Caution
points upwards.
Install
WARNING


– Press the plug fuse - 2 - towards the inside arrow -B-, the plug
connection is plugged into the ignition for airbag as far as it
can go and is locked into place at the same time.
Installation is carried out
unless in thebyreverse
authorised ŠKODA AUTO order. WhenAUTO
A. S. ŠKODA installing,
A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
note the following: with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
WARNING

WARNING
Make sure that the surface of the knee airbag cannot be dam‐
aged by mechanical loads.
♦ After completing the work, carry out a visual inspection to
see whether the surface of the knee airbag is not dam‐
aged.
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “3.24 Summary of components - knee airbag”, page 365
3.26 After replacement, configure the control

unit
3. Airbags 367
♦ Vehicle diagnosis, measurement and information system -

VAS- ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester
♦ Diagnostic cable.
After replacing the control unit for the airbag and carrying out the
automatic test sequence using the ODIS program in the tab “Test
plan”, select the suggested test “Code control unit for airbag” (fol‐
low the in-test instructions) or select the following procedure:
– In the “ Test plan ” tab, press “ Select self-test ”.
– Select “Body”.
– “Select the assembly work on the body ”.
– Select “Self-diagnosable systems”.
– “ Select Airbag UDS) ”.
– “Select function- airbag”.
– “Select Code control unit for airbag”.
Note
Do not carry out any coding via SVM!

4 Crash sensors for airbag

⇒ “4.1 Overview of fitting location - crash sensors for airbag”, page
369
⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing the crash sensor for front airbag
”, page 370
⇒ “4.3 Removing and installing the crash sensor for side airbag ”,
page 372
⇒ “4.4 Removing and installing the crash sensor for side airbag
rear ”, page 374
⇒ “4.5 Removing and installing seat occupation sensor front pas‐
senger side ”, page 375
4.1 Overview of fitting location - crash sensors for airbag
1 - Crash sensor for side airbag

on front passenger side
❑ Fitting location in the
door.
❑ Precautions when han‐
dling the crash sensors
(pressure sensors) for
front side airbag
⇒ “3.6 Safety instruc‐
tions for crash sensors
(pressure
Protected sensors)
by copyright. forprivate or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Copying for
front
unless side
authorised airbag”,
page 344 .
stalling the crash sensor
for side airbag ”,
page 372 .
2 - Crash sensor for rear side
airbag on front passenger side
❑ Fitting position under
the wheel house trim.
stalling the crash sensor
for side airbag rear ”,
page 374 .
3 - Screw
❑ 9 Nm
4 - Screw
❑ 9 Nm
5 - Crash sensor for rear side
airbag on driver's side
❑ Fitting location: under
the wheel house trim.
⇒ “4.4 Removing and installing the crash sensor for side airbag rear ”, page 374 .
6 - Crash sensor side airbag on driver's side
❑ Fitting location in the door.
❑ Precautions when handling the crash sensors (pressure sensors) for front side airbag
⇒ “3.6 Safety instructions for crash sensors (pressure sensors) for front side airbag”, page 344 .
4. Crash sensors for airbag 369

❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4.3 Removing and installing the crash sensor for side airbag ”, page 372 .
7 - Crash sensor for front airbag
❑ Fitting location in the centre of the vehicle at the lock carrier.
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing the crash sensor for front airbag ”, page 370 .
8 - Screw
❑ 9 Nm.
9 - Crash sensor for pedestrian protection system (depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle)
❑ Removing and installing:
– Removing front bumper ⇒ “1.1 Summary of components - Front bumper”, page 214 .
– Disconnect the plug connection for the sensor.
– Unclip sensor from the bumper.
4.2 Removing and installing the crash sen‐

sor for front airbag
Removing
WARNING


– Remove screw - 1, 3 -.
– Unlock fuse -arrow-, remove cover -2-.
– Where installed, place down the coolant hose - 2 - to one send

(depends on the engine variant).
– Unlock catches -arrows-, remove air guide pipe top -1-.

– Remove screws on the left and right - arrow -.

– Unscrew and remove the air guide pipe bottom - 1 -.
– Remove the screw - 2 - and remove the crash sensor - 3 - for

front airbag at the lock carrier.
– To do so, pull out the fuse - 2 - and push it downwards

- arrow -, disconnect the plug connection - 1 - at the crash
sensor.

Install
WARNING

– Plug in the plug connection - 1 - until it audibly locks into place

in the crash sensor - arrow -.
– Press in the plug fuse - 2 - - this locks the plug connection.
note the following:
Note

WARNING

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “4.1 Overview of fitting location - crash sensors for airbag”,
page 369

sor for side airbag

Removing
WARNING
♦ When working on the airbags, observe the general safety

instructions for working on airbag, belt tensioner and bat‐
tery separation units (pyrotechnical components).
♦ Safety instructions for crash sensors (pressure sensors)
for front side airbag
⇒ “3.6 Safety instructions for crash sensors (pressure
sensors) for front side airbag”, page 344 .


– Pull out the fuse - 2 - and push it downwards - arrow -, dis‐
connect the plug connection - 1 - at the crash sensor.
– Release the catch - 2 - and turn the crash sensor fuse - 1 -

anti-clockwise by around 45°- arrow - .
– Remove sensor - 3 - through the door opening.
Install
WARNING

instructions for working on airbag, belt tensioner and bat‐
tery separation units (pyrotechnical components).
♦ Safety instructions for crash sensors (pressure sensors)
for front side airbag
⇒ “3.6 Safety instructions for crash sensors (pressure
sensors) for front side airbag”, page 344 .
Ensure tightness of the door for smooth operation of the crash
sensor (pressure sensor).
Make sure the seal - 2 - is seated correctly. Replace the crash
sensor if damaged or deformed.
– Make sure the seal - 2 - is seated correctly. Replace crash

sensor with a new part if damaged or deformed.
– Insert the crash sensor into the door opening so that the cut‐
outs lock into place in the door opening.
– Turn the fuse - 1 - for the crash sensor clockwise - arrow - .
– The locking pin - 3 - must be heard to click into place.


WARNING


note the following:
WARNING


sor for side airbag rear
Removing
WARNING

instructions for working on airbag, belt tensioner
Protected and
by copyright. bat‐for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Copying
tery separation units (pyrotechnical unless
components).
– Remove wheel house trim from C pillar

– Unscrew screw - 1 - and remove crash sensor - 2 - for the side
airbag from the body.

– To do so, pull out the plug fuse - 2 - and push it downwards

- arrow -, disconnect the plug connection - 1 - at the crash
sensor.
Install
WARNING


WARNING


note the following:
WARNING

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “4.1 Overview of fitting location - crash sensors for airbag”,
page 369
4.5 Removing and installing seat occupa‐

tion sensor front passenger side
Note
The seat occupation sensor is only installed in the front passenger

seat.

Removing
WARNING

– Remove front passenger seat

– Remove cover and upholstery from seat well
of the front seat cushions”, page 482 .
– Disconnect the plug connection for the seat occupation sen‐
sor.
– Press off the retaining clip - 1 - from the seat well and remove
the seat occupation sensor - 2 -.
Install
WARNING

The new seat occupation sensor must be fitted in the same
position as the old seat occupation sensor.

following points:
– Press in the retaining clip for the seat occupation sensor until
it audibly locks into place into the seat well.
WARNING


note the following:
WARNING


5 Airbag control unit

page 377
⇒ “5.2 Removing and installing the airbag control unit J234 ”, page
378
5.1 Airbag control unit - Summary of components
1 - Airbag control unit - J234-

stalling the airbag con‐
trol unit J234 ”,
page 378 .
❑ The ground connection
for the control unit is im‐
plemented with the
housing unit at the body.
WARNING
The control unit can con‐
tinue to be used after an
activation by a pedes‐
trian protection system.
Each pedestrian protec‐
tion system can be acti‐
vated independently of
the other systems.
The control unit can be
reused:
For
♦ activating the seat‐
belt system - 3 times.
For
♦ activating the airbag
system - 3 times.
For
♦ activating the pedes‐
trian protection system- 3
times.
After the third activation
of the individual pedes‐
trian protection system,
the control unit for the
airbag will need to be re‐
placed.
After each time the con‐
trol unit is activated:
Query
♦ and erase event
memory of the airbag
control unit ⇒ Vehicle di‐
agnostic tester.
If the control unit has
been replaced, it must be
coded, adapt the compo‐
nents (code)
⇒ “3.26 After replace‐
ment, configure the con‐
trol unit”, page 367 .
2 - Nut with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
❑ The nuts and earth bolts serve as earth connection for the control unit.
5. Airbag control unit 377

❑ The threads must be free of paint and dirt.
❑ 9 Nm.
3 - Nut
❑ The nuts and earth bolts serve as earth connection for the control unit.
❑ The threads must be free of paint and dirt.
❑ 9 Nm.
4 - Control unit connector
5.2 Removing and installing the airbag con‐

trol unit - J234-
Removing
WARNING
When working on the airbag control unit , observe the general

safety instructions for working on airbag, belt tensioner and
battery separation units (pyrotechnical components)
Removing
– Remove cover for central console in driver and front passen‐
ger foot well
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing centre console without arm‐
rest”, page 301 .

– Release the nut -3- in the front of the footwell on the driver's
side.
– Unlock the locking mechanism from the plug -5- starting from
the footwell on the front passenger side.
– Disconnect the plug from the control unit.
– Disconnect the electrical plug connection at the front of the
foot well - to do so, unlock the connector lock and disconnect
the locking mount - 5 - on the connector - arrow -.
– Unscrew the nuts - 1, 4 -.
– Remove the airbag control unit -2- from the thread bolts and
remove it towards the front passenger side.
Note
The dash panel and heating and air-conditioning unit have been
removed to improve the display.
Install
following points:
Note
Make sure the plug connection for the control unit is plugged in
as far as it can go and audibly clicks into place.
WARNING

– Observe the instructions on re-using/replacing the control unit
page 377 .
Note
If the airbag warning light - K75- signals a fault after assembly,

query and erase the event memory and then query it again.
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “5.1 Airbag control unit - Summary of components ”,
page 377
5. Airbag control unit 379

6 Hinges for the pedestrian protection

system
⇒ “6.1 Set hinges for pedestrian protection system into the initial
position after activation”, page 380
6.1 Set hinges for pedestrian protection sys‐

tem into the initial position after activa‐
tion
♦ Vehicle diagnosis, measurement and information system
VAS/ODIS
♦ Riveting tongs, e.g. - V.A.G. 1765B-
♦ Shear rivets with spacer ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original
Parts
DANGER!
When working with actuators, observe the safety instructions

Before handling pyrotechnical components and before discon‐
necting the ignition and ground lines, the mechanic must dis‐
charge himself electrostatically! When electrostatic discharges
occur, there is a risk of the airbag being activated unintention‐
ally.
This occurs, for example, by briefly touching the body or the
door closing wedge.
Any damaged parts and electrical lines in the engine compart‐
ment and in the plenum chamber must be inspected after
activation of the pedestrian protection system.
♦ Repair or replace defective parts.
♦ Replace electrical lines.
• The airbag control unit can be reused after activation of
the pedestrian protection system
page 377 .
• The hinge which is undamaged after activation of the pe‐
destrian protection system can be used a maximum of 3
more times after being set into the initial position.
• The hinge damaged after activation of the pedestrian pro‐
tection system must not be reused.
• Actuators must always be replaced after activation of the
pedestrian protection system.
• The front flap which is undamaged after activating the pe‐
destrian protection
Protected system
by copyright. can
Copying for beorreused
private commercial after theinhinge
purposes, part or in whole, is not permitted
is setunless
into the initial
authorised position.
• The front flap which is damaged after activating the front
pedestrian protection system must be repaired or re‐
placed depending on the extent of the damage.

6.1.1 Summary of components - hinges for the pedestrian protection system after
activation
1 - Hinge mid section for the

pedestrian protection system
2 - Openings after sheared
shear rivets
3 - Hinge top section for the
❑ Secured to front flap.
❑ Remove the hinges as
on vehicles without an
activated pedestrian
protection system
stalling the actuator for
the front flap”, page 27 .
4 - Locking lever for top stop of
hinge
– Manually press the lock‐
ing lever into the initial
position for top stop
manually
⇒ Fig. ““Set the locking
lever into the initial posi‐
tion”“ , page 382
5 - Spacer - new
❑ Renew ⇒ Electronic
Catalogue of Original
Parts .
❑ Work procedure
⇒ “6.1.2 Set hinges for
pedestrian protection
system into the initial
position”, page 382 .
6 - Hinge bottom section for
❑ Fastened to longitudinal
beam.
❑ Remove the hinges as on vehicles without an activated pedestrian protection system
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing the actuator for the front flap”, page 27 .
7 - Shear rivets- new
❑ Renew ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts .
❑ Work procedure
⇒ “6.1.2 Set hinges for pedestrian protection system into the initial position”, page 382 .
8 - Activated actuator
❑ Removing:
– Disconnect the plug connection from the plenum chamber.

❑ Install the actuator as on vehicles without an activated pedestrian protection system
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing the actuator for the front flap”, page 27 .
6. Hinges for the pedestrian protection system 381

WARNING
Before handling pyro‐
technical components
and before disconnect‐
ing the ignition and
ground lines, the me‐
chanic must discharge
himself electrostatically!
When electrostatic dis‐
charges occur, there is a
risk of the airbag being
activated unintentionally.
This occurs, for exam‐
ple, by briefly touching
the body or the door clos‐
ing wedge.
9 - Nut
❑ 9 Nm
6.1.2 Set hinges for pedestrian protection sys‐

tem into the initial position
Note
♦ The setting of the hinges for the pedestrian protection system

into the initial position can be carried out without removing the
hinges.
♦ The setting of the hinges for the pedestrian protection system
into the initial position must be carried out on both sides of the
vehicle!

– Remove activated actuator ⇒ Item 8 (page 381) .
– Lift the hinges of the front flap a little.
– Press in the locking lever - 1 - manually in
- direction of arrow - into the initial position.
Set the locking lever into the initial position
I - Locking lever - 1 - in activated position.
II - Locking lever - 1 - in initial position.
– Move the top part of hinge - 3 - against the hinge mid section
- 2 - so that the hinge bolt - 4 - is in the top position and at the
same time the openings overlap after the sheared shear rivet
⇒ Item 2 (page 381) .

– Rivet on new shear rivets - 1 - with spacer - 2 - using riveting

tongs e.g. - V.A.G. 1765B- .
– Install a new actuator
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing the actuator for the front flap”,
page 27 .
WARNING
When working on the hinges for the pedestrian protection sys‐

tem, observe the general safety instructions for working on
airbag, belt tensioner and battery separation units (pyrotech‐
nical components).
WARNING

DANGER!
Be careful when connecting the battery!
– Check the adjustment of the front flap ⇒ Body repair work;

Rep. gr. 00 .
– Query and erase event memory of the airbag control unit
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
– If the control unit has been replaced, it must be coded, adapt
the components (code)
⇒ “3.26 After replacement, configure the control unit”,
page 367 .
6. Hinges for the pedestrian protection system 383

70 – Trim, insulation
1 Dash panel
⇒ “1.1 Summary of components - dash panel”, page 384
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing passenger glove compartment”,
page 389
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing passenger side glove compart‐
ment support”, page 391
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing glovebox on driver's side”,
page 392
⇒ “1.5 Removing and installing the steering column trim panel”,
page 393
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing the central tube of dash panel”,
page 394
1.1 Summary of components - dash panel
1 - Dash panel
2 - Screw
1.5 Nm.
384 Rep. gr.70 - Trim, insulation

Removing
Note
Disconnect battery earth strap ⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr. 27 .
– Remove driver's airbag unit

⇒ “3.12 Removing and installing airbag unit with ignition for
airbag driver's side ”, page 351 .
– Remove the steering wheel
⇒ “3.10 Summary of components of steering wheel”,
page 349 .
– Remove steering column trim panel
⇒ “1.5 Removing and installing the steering column trim pan‐
el”, page 393 .
– Removing dash panel insert ⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr.
90 .
– Removing steering-column control ⇒ Electrical System; Rep.
gr. 94 .
– Remove light switch ⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr. 96 .
– Remove potentiometer plug for headlamp range control ⇒
Electrical system ; Rep. gr. 96 .
– Remove the warning light switch and airbag warning light ⇒
Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 .
– Remove the radio or navigation unit (depending on the equip‐
ment installed in the vehicle)⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 91 .
– On vehicles without radio or navigation, remove the storage
compartment of the middle dash panel.
Air conditioning system with manual control
– Remove the heater control ⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep.
gr. 87 .
Automatic air conditioning system
– Removing the control and display unit for air conditioning sys‐
tem with control unit ⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 87 .
– Remove the sunlight penetration photosensor ⇒ Heating and
Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 87 .
⇒ “2.2 Summary of components - Centre console”,
page 299 .
1. Dash panel 385

– Remove screen bottom -1- in -direction of arrow A- and dis‐

connect plug connectors for USB connections and external
audio sources ⇒ Electrical system ; Rep. gr. 91 .
– Remove the lateral dash panel covers -1 and 2- e.g. using the
disassembly wedge -3409-.
– Remove the top trim panel of the pillar A
404 .
– Remove supports for glovebox on front passenger side
partment support”, page 391 .
– Remove screw -1- (1.5 Nm).

1. Dash panel 387


– Disconnect airbag unit plug connector on front passenger’s
side
⇒ “3.14 Summary of components - Airbag on front passenger
side”, page 354 .
– Remove fixing screws for front passenger's airbag unit - 1 -

(9 Nm).
– Pull the dash panel partly out of the supports in the transition
area to the windscreen.
– Disconnect the fastening of head airbag cables from the dash
panel around the A pillar.
– Remove the dash panel - 1 - from the vehicle with the assis‐
tance of a second mechanic.

Install
Note
Before the installation, check all the fixing elements for damage,
if necessary replace.
1.2 Removing and installing passenger

glove compartment
Removing
– Open the glovebox on the front passenger
by ŠKODAside.
unless authorised AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Lift the brake cable - 2 - with a screwdriver in direction of arrow
- A - until it disengages from the hinge in the dash panel
- 3 -.
– Lift the glovebox in the opened position in the direction of arrow
- B - until the dash panel comes undone at the lower hinges
- 3 -.
– Close the lower glovebox in direction of arrow - C - and drop
down.
1. Dash panel 389

– Remove the glovebox.
– Insert and lift the glovebox with the upper edge behind the stop
for the glovebox support.
– Insert the brake cable - 1 - into the hinge of the dash panel
- 2 -.
– Guide the lower section of the glovebox into the hinges of the
dash panel.

– In the opened position, press on the underbody of the glove‐

box in direction of arrow until the glovebox engages into the
hinges.
Note
1.3 Removing and installing passenger side

glove compartment support
Removing
– Remove the glove compartment on front passenger's side
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing passenger glove compart‐
ment”, page 389 .
1. Dash panel 391

– By inserting into the vehicle, remove the support - 2 - from the

dash panel - 1 -.
– Remove the plug connector for the Infotainment control unit
(depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle) ⇒ Elec‐
trical system ; Rep. gr. 91 .
– Remove the supply hose for the air-conditioned glove box and
remove the support.
Install
Note
1.4 Removing and installing glovebox on

driver's side
Removing
– Open the glovebox on the driver's side - 1 - in
- direction of arrow - up to the stop.
– Undo the glovebox - 1 - by raising the stop for the dash panel,
e.g. using a screwdriver.
– Fold back the glovebox - 1- behind the stop and remove from
the dash panel - 2 -.

Install
Note
1.5 Removing and installing the steering

column trim panel
Removing
– Slacken the fixing lever of the steering wheel adjustment.
– Pull out the steering column and press it down.
– Remove cover - 1 - from the dash panel insert.
1. Dash panel 393

– Loosen the top part of the steering column trim panel -2- from
the supports.
– Remove the top part of the steering column trim panel -1-.
– Release the screws from the bottom part of the steering col‐
umn trim panel - 1 - (1.5 Nm).
– Loosen the bottom part of the steering column trim panel -2-
from the supports.
Install
1.6 Removing and installing the central tube

of dash panel
Removing
– Removing dash panel
⇒ “1.1 Summary of components - dash panel”, page 384 .

– Remove the footwell vent on the driver's and front passenger

side ⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 80 .
– Remove the screws of the e-box from the central tube and
leave the e-box in the central tube as a temporary measure ⇒
Electrical system ; Rep. gr. 97 .
– Remove the steering column assembly from the central pipe
⇒ Chassis; Rep. gr. 48 .
– Disconnect the clips for the electrical lines and ground con‐
nections to the central tube.
– Remove the fixing screw for the blower and the screws for the
heater unit ⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 80 .
– Remove wiper arms and wiper motor ⇒ Electrical System;
Rep. gr. 92 .
page
Protected 16 . Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
by copyright.
– respect
with Releaseto the the screw
correctness -1- in the
of information plenum
in this document.chamber
Copyright by on theAUTO
ŠKODA driver's
A. S.�
side (20 Nm).
1. Dash panel 395

– Press out spreading pins -2-.

– Pull out expanding rivets.
– Remove the intermediate piece -3- ⇒ Heating, Air Condition‐
ing; Rep. gr. 80 .
– Remove air guide duct -1- ⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep.
gr. 80 .
– Release nuts -3- (20 Nm).

– Remove the central tube - 2 -, do so by disconnecting the e-

Box from the central tube.
Install
Note
1. Dash panel 397

2 Door and side trim panels

driver's side”, page 398
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing the rear door trim panel ”,
page 400
2.1 Removing and installing the front door

trim panel on the driver's side
Removing
– Remove trim -2- for power window lifter ⇒ Electrical System;
Rep. gr. 96 and disconnect plugs -3 and 4-.
– Unclip the trim -6- e.g. using the disassembly wedge - T10383,
3409- .
– Turn the nut -7 - by 90° at the bottom side using the open-end
spanner SW 10 and unlock the catch peg.

Caution
When releasing the door trim panel, there is the risk that dam‐
age may occur on the fixing elements! To prevent this, the
specified location and order of the clip connections to be loos‐
ened must absolutely be kept when removing the door trim
panel!
– Loosen the door trim panel in the -specified order - out of the
clip connections. To do so, use e.g. a wide plastic wedge -
T10383/1, T10383- .
–withauthorised
unless Pull thebydoor
ŠKODA trim panel
AUTO towards
A. S. ŠKODA AUTOtheA. S.top
doesand out of or
not guarantee the window
accept any liability
channel.
2. Door and side trim panels 399

– Push the Bowden cable -3- on the inside of the door trim panel
out of the inner door control -2- in -direction of arrow- and un‐
clip the end piece -1-.
– Disconnect the electrical plug connections from the door trim
panel depending on the vehicle equipment.
Install
Note
2.2 Removing and installing the rear door

trim panel
Removing
– Carefully clip the trim -3- out of the door trim panel using e.g.
the disassembly wedge - T10383, 3409- .


Vehicles with window crank
– Remove window crank.
– To do so, press the detention ring - 2 - in direction of arrow
- a -.
– Slide detention ring - 2 - in direction of arrow - b -.
– Remove window crank - 1 - in direction of arrow - c - from the
shaft.
Caution
When releasing the door trim panel, there is the risk that dam‐
age may occur on the fixing elements! To prevent this, the
specified location and order of the clip connections to be loos‐
ened must absolutely be kept when removing the door trim
panel!
– Loosen the door trim panel in the -specified order - out of the
clip connections. To do so, use e.g. a wide plastic wedge -
T10383/1, T10383- .

– Pull the door trim panel towards the top and out of the window
channel.
– Push the Bowden cable -3- on the inside of the door trim panel
out of the inner door control -2- in -direction of arrow- and un‐
clip the end piece -1-.
– Disconnect the plug connections of the wiring looms from the
door trim panel depending on the vehicle equipment.
Install
Note

On vehicles with manual windows, the window crank, when the

window s closed, is tilted downwards from the water level at an
angle of 60°.

3 Trim panels of pillars

⇒ “3.1 Removing and installing top trim panel of pillar A”,
page 404
⇒ “3.2 Removing and installing bottom trim panel of pillar A on the
driver's side”, page 405
⇒ “3.3 Removing and installing bottom trim panel of pillar A on the
front passenger side”, page 407
page 408
page 409
⇒ “3.6 Removing and installing trim panel of pillar C”, page 411
⇒ “3.7 Removing and installing the top C pillar trim panel (Octavia
pillar”, page 413
3.1 Removing and installing top trim panel

of pillar A
Removing
– Unlock the A pillar trim panel - 1 - by unclipping it from the
mounts on the A pillar.
– Move the trim upwards along the A pillar trim and remove.

unless Install
– Firstly, install trim panels behind the fin on the dash panel.
– Close the trim panel to the pillar until the clips engage.
Note
♦ Before the installation, check all the fixing elements for dam‐
age, if necessary replace.
♦ Ensure that the trim panel is located in the double-braided strip
of the door seal after the installation.
3.2 Removing and installing bottom trim

panel of pillar A on the driver's side
Removing
– Remove the operating lever for the front flap - 2 -
⇒ “1.11 Removing and installing operating lever - Summary of
components”, page 37 .
– Remove the cap for the straddling dowels.
– Remove the straddling dowels - 3 -.
3. Trim panels of pillars 405

– Undo trim securing mechanism -1- by folding it back into the

vehicle.
– Clip out the trim - 1 - towards the top and out of the mounts in
the body bottom side rail and lower B-pillar trim.
– Remove the trim panel.
Note
Before the installation, check the straddling dowel -3- for damage, if necessary replace.
Install
Note
Ensure that the trim panel is located in the double-braided strip


3.3 Removing and installing bottom trim

panel of pillar A on the front passenger
side
Removing
– Undo trim securing mechanism by folding it back into the ve‐
hicle.
– Clip out the trim - 1 - towards the top and out of the mounts in
the body bottom side rail and lower B-pillar trim.

Install

Note
♦ Ensure that the trim panel is located in the double-braided strip
3.4 Removing and installing top B-pillar trim

panel
Removing
– Unclip the cover -2- for the screw marked or unmarked with
“airbag” (depending upon vehicle equipment).
– Remove trim - 1 - from the guide on the lower B pillar trim.
– Push the trim panel -1- at the top end out of the supports in
the roof.

– Release screw for front seat belt -1- (40 Nm).

– Run the seat belt through the opening in the trim panel.
– Take the console out of the vehicle.
Install
– After attaching the trim panel, ensure that the trim panel is
located in the double-braided strip of the door seal.
Note
♦ On vehicles with seat belt height adjuster, ensure before fas‐
tening that the seat belt height adjuster is located at the shell
and the slider of the seat belt height adjuster is in the top po‐
sition at the trim panel.
♦ After the installation has been performed, carry out a func‐
tional test of the seat belt height adjuster.
♦ Make sure that the seat belt is correctly positioned and has
unobstructed movement.
3.5 Removing and installing bottom B-pillar

trim panel
Removing
– Remove top trim panel of B pillar
page 408 .
– Unclip the upper part of the lower trim - 1 - from the B pillar in
direction of the vehicle interior.
– Lift rear part of the lower A pillar trim or remove the trim
⇒ “3.2 Removing and installing bottom trim panel of pillar A on
the driver's side”, page 405 .
– Unclip the lower trim - 1 - towards the top and out of the bottom
side rail and wheel house trim.
– Separate the lower trim underneath the belt's and run the belt
- 2 - out of the trim.

Install
– After installing the trim panels, ensure that the trim panels are
located in the double-braided strip of the door seal.
– Check whether the bottom B-pillar trim panel and the A pillar
trim panel and wheel house trim are clipped together and fit‐
ted.

Note
♦ On vehicles with seat belt height adjuster, ensure before in‐
stalling that the seat belt height adjuster is located at the shell
and the slider of the seat belt height adjuster is in the top po‐
sition at the trim panel.
♦ After the installation has been performed, carry out a func‐
tional test of the seat belt height adjuster.
♦ Make sure that the seat belt is correctly positioned and has
unobstructed movement.
3.6 Removing and installing trim panel of

pillar C
Removing
– Loosen the C-pillar trim panel -1- in the front area out of the
double-braided strip of the door seal.

– Loosen from the tailgate seal in the rear area.

– Unclip the trim panel from the holding clamps - 2 -.
– Push the guides of the C-pillar trim panel out of the luggage
compartment trim panel and take the trim panel out of the ve‐
hicle.
Install
Note
– After installing the trim panel, ensure that the trim panel is lo‐
cated in the double-braided strip of the door seal.
3.7 Removing and installing the top C pillar trim panel (Octavia III - Combi)

Removing
– Remove bottom wheel house trim from C pillar
– Partially remove the side trim in the luggage compartment
trim panel (Octavia III - Combi)”, page 429 so that the top C
pillar trim can be unhooked.
– Unclip trim panel - 1 - from clip - 2 -.
– Push the guides of the C pillar trim panel out of the top open‐
ings in the bodyshell and take the trim panel out of the vehicle.
Install
Note
– After installing the trim panel, ensure that the trim panel is lo‐
cated in the double-braided strip of the door seal.
3.8 Removing and installing the wheel

house trim on the C pillar
Note with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
♦ To provide a clearer illustration, the seat bench and the back‐

rest are not shown in the illustration.
♦ Different trim version for vehicles with a side airbag - 2 -.

Removing
page 466 .
Vehicles with side airbag
WARNING
– Remove side airbag

⇒ “3.18 Summary of components - side airbag rear”,
page 359 .
– Remove plastic rivet - 4 -.
– Remove plastic nuts - 3 -.
– Remove holding clamps from the mounts on the body by pull‐
ing off the trim into the vehicle.

Note
When removing the wheel house trim, set the seat backrest into a suitable position.
– Lift rear part of the lower B pillar trim or remove the trim
page 409 .
– Unscrew wheel house trim - 1 - or - 2 - from the lower B pillar
trim and remove.
Install
Note
♦ Before the installation, check all the fixing elements for damage, if necessary replace.
♦ Ensure that the wheel house trim panel is placed in the double-braided strip of the door seal after the
installation.
WARNING
– Install the side airbag

page 359 .

4 Removing and installing the wheel

house trim of the C pillar (Octavia III
- Combi)
Note
♦ To provide a clearer illustration, the seat bench and the back‐

rest are not shown in the illustration.
♦ Different trim version for vehicles with a side airbag - 2 -.
Removing
page 466 .

WARNING
– Remove side airbag

page 359 .
For all vehicles
– Remove plastic rivet - 4 -.
– Remove plastic nuts - 3 -.
– Remove holding clamps from the mounts on the body by pull‐
ing off the trim into the vehicle.
Note
When removing the wheel house trim, set the seat backrest into a suitable position.
– Lift rear part of the lower B pillar trim or remove the trim
page 409 .
– Unscrew wheel house trim - 1 - or - 2 - from the lower B pillar
trim and remove.
Install
Note
♦ Ensure that the wheel house trim panel is placed in the double-braided strip of the door seal after the
installation.
WARNING
– Install the side airbag

page 359 .
4. Removing and installing the wheel house trim of the C pillar (Octavia III - Combi) 417
5 Removing and installing the D column trim (Octavia III - Combi)
Removing
– Partially remove the tailgate release switch in the area of the
D column trim panel.
– Unclip the brackets on the D column trim panel - 2 - in se‐
quence.
– Unclip brackets - 3 -.
– Slide out the trim panel from the side luggage compartment
trim panel and take out of the vehicle.
Install

Note
♦ Ensure that the D column trim panel is placed in the D column
trim panel after the installation.
5. Removing and installing the D column trim (Octavia III - Combi) 419
6 Tailgate trim panel

page 420
⇒ “6.2 Removing and installing the tailgate trim panel (Octavia III
- Combi)”, page 421
⇒ “6.3 Removing and installing the tailgate trim”, page 422
⇒ “6.4 Removing and installing the tailgate trim (Octavia III - Com‐
bi)”, page 423
6.1 Removing and installing the tailgate trim panel
Removing
– Release screws -6- and remove the pull handle -5-.
– Remove cover for rear window wiper motor ⇒ Electrical Sys‐
tem; Rep. gr. 92 .
– Unclip the plastic clips - 1 - in succession.
– Remove the trim panel - 2 - from the door - 7 -.

Install
Note
♦ When installing, re-fit the tailgate trim panel into the door lock guide.
6.2 Removing and installing the tailgate trim panel (Octavia III - Combi)
Removing
– Release screws -4- and remove the pull handle -5-.
– Unclip the brackets on the tailgate - 1 - in sequence.
– Plastic clip for bolt - 4 - .
– Remove the trim panel -3- from the tailgate.
Install
6. Tailgate trim panel 421

Note
♦ When installing, re-fit the tailgate trim panel into the door lock guide.
6.3 Removing and installing the tailgate trim
Removing
– Unclip the holding clamps on the sides of the door.
– Unclip the holding clamps on the upper side of the door.
Install
– Insert the trim panel at the cover frame for the brake light -3-.
– Clip the frame at the upper side of the door.
– Insert the trim panel for the tailgate underneath the ends of the
trim.
– Clip the window trim at the sides.Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted

Note
Before the installation, check all the fixing elements for damage, if necessary replace.
6.4 Removing and installing the tailgate trim (Octavia III - Combi)
Removing unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Remove the tailgate trim panel
⇒ “6.2 Removing and installing the tailgate trim panel (Octavia
III - Combi)”, page 421 .
– Unscrew and remove the air guide pipe - 3 -.
– Unclip the holding clamps on the sides of the flap - 1 -.
– Unclip the holding clamps on the top side of the flap - 1 -.
– Remove the trim panel -2-.
Install
– Clip the frame at the upper side of the flap.
– Clip the window trim at the sides.
6. Tailgate trim panel 423

– Secure the flap with plastic rivets. - 3 - .
Note
Before the installation, check all the fixing elements for damage, if necessary replace.

7 Luggage compartment trim panels

⇒ “7.1 Removing and installing the tailgate/luggage compartment
cover”, page 425
⇒ “7.2 Removing and installing the tailgate/luggage compartment
cover (Octavia III - Combi)”, page 426
⇒ “7.3 Removing and installing top part of side luggage compart‐
ment trim panel”, page 427
panel”, page 428
trim panel (Octavia III - Combi)”, page 429
⇒ “7.6 Removing and installing the seat backrests ”, page 431
⇒ “7.7 Removing and installing the unlocking mechanism on the
seat backrests (Octavia III - Combi)”, page 433
7.1 Removing and installing the tailgate/lug‐

gage compartment cover
Removing
7. Luggage compartment trim panels 425


tailgate/luggage compartment cover.
– Remove the tailgate/luggage compartment cover - 1 - towards
the top and out of lock carrier, this releases the holding clamps.
Install
Note
– Ensure that the tailgate/luggage compartment cover is located

in the double-braided strip of the tailgate seal after the instal‐
lation.
7.2 Removing and installing the tailgate/luggage compartment cover (Octavia

III - Combi)

– Unscrew and remove the plastic rivets - 3 -.

– Remove the tailgate/luggage compartment cover - 1 - towards
the top and out of lock carrier, this releases the holding clamps
- 2 -.
Install
Note
– Ensure that the tailgate/luggage compartment cover is located

in the double-braided strip of the tailgate seal after the instal‐
lation.
7.3 Removing and installing top part of side luggage compartment trim panel
1 - Top part of side luggage

compartment trim panel
Removing
– Remove wheel house

trim panel
stalling the wheel house
trim on the C pillar”,
page 413 .
– Remove the trim panel

of pillar C
stalling trim panel of pil‐
lar C”, page 411 .
– Unclip the trim panel out

of the supports of the
body.
Install
– Installation is carried out by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
Protected
in the reverse order.unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
2 - Adjusting nut
3 - Screw
2.5 Nm.

7.4 Removing and installing side luggage compartment trim panel
Note
The side trim can deviate depending on the vehicle's equipment level.
– Remove increased luggage compartment floor (if present)

⇒ “8.2 Removing and installing increased compartment floor”,
page 435 .
– Remove the luggage compartment trim panel.
– Remove the tailgate/luggage compartment cover
⇒ “7.1 Removing and installing the tailgate/luggage compart‐
ment cover”, page 425 .
page 466 .

– Remove rear side airbag and if necessary airbag (depending

upon vehicle equipment)
page 359 .
– Remove bolt -4- (1.2 Nm) for retaining clips -3-.
– Unscrew the bolt - 5 - (2.5 Nm) of the hook for bags - 6 - (left
side only).
luggage compartment trim panel.
– Partly slide the trim panel.
– Remove plug for boot light ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 .
– Disconnect plug for power socket (left side onl) ⇒ Electrical
system; Rep. gr. 96 .
– Take the trim panel -1- out of the luggage compartment.
Install
– Installation
Protected is carried
by copyright. Copying for privateout in the reverse
or commercial purposes, in order.
part or in whole, is not permitted
Note
7.5 Removing and installing the side luggage compartment trim panel (Octavia
III - Combi)

Removing
Note
The side trim can deviate depending on the vehicle's equipment level.
– Remove increased luggage compartment floor (if present)

page 435 .
– Take out roller blind for luggage compartment.
– Remove storage tray (right side only).
– Unhook the luggage compartment trim from the subwoofer
(depending on the vehicle equipment).
– Remove the tailgate/luggage compartment cover
⇒ “7.2 Removing and installing the tailgate/luggage compart‐
ment cover (Octavia III - Combi)”, page 426 .
page 466 .

– Remove rear side airbag and if necessary airbag (depending

upon vehicle equipment)
page 359 .
– Remove bolt - 7 - (2, 5 Nm) for retaining clips - 6 -.
– Unscrew screws - 1 - (7 Nm) of the hook for bags - 3 -.
– Unscrew and remove the plastic rivet - 5 -.
– Unscrew and remove the plastic rivet - 8 -.
– Remove screws - 4 - (2, 5 Nm).
luggage compartment trim panel.
– Partly slide the trim panel.
– Remove plug for boot light ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 96 .
– Remove connector for the electrical socket ⇒ Electrical sys‐
tem; Rep. gr. 96 .
– Take the trim panel -2- out of the luggage compartment.
Install
Note
7.6 Removing and installing the seat backrests

Remove - Unlock in the upper part of the side luggage compart‐

ment trim panel:
– Remove Bowden wire - 3 - from operating lever of mounting
bracket - 1 - in direction of arrow - A -.
– Turn in direction of arrow - B -.
– Unhook the control cable in - C - from the mounting bracket.
– If the Bowden wire - 3 - is removed, unclip from the mounting
- 6 - in direction of arrow - D - and thread through the opening
in the trim - 5 - in direction of arrow - F -.
Install
Removal - unlocking in the seat backrest:
– Removing the rear seat bench
– Remove the cover - 7 unless
- on the seatbyrest
authorised ŠKODA - 5AUTO
-. A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability

– Unhook the control cable from the operating lever in direction

of arrow - E -.
– Pull the Bowden wire out of the armrest.
Install
7.7 Removing and installing the unlocking mechanism on the seat backrests
(Octavia III - Combi)
Remove - Unlock in the upper part of the side luggage compart‐

ment trim panel:
– Removing top side trim panel in luggage compartment
trim panel (Octavia III - Combi)”, page 429 .
– Remove Bowden wire - 3 - from operating lever of mounting
bracket - 2 - in direction of arrow - A -.
– Unhook the control cable from the operating lever of the holder
and pull out in the direction of arrow - B - .
– If the Bowden wire - 3 - is removed, unclip from the mounting
- 6 - in direction of arrow - D -, from the mounting - 3 - in di‐

rection of arrow - C - and thread through the opening in the

trim - 5 - in direction of arrow - F -.
Install
Removal - unlocking in the seat backrest:
– Removing the rear seat bench
– Remove the cover - 7 - on the seat rest - 5 -.
– Unhook the control cable from the operating lever in direction
of arrow - E -.
– Pull the Bowden wire out of the armrest.
Install

8 Increased luggage compartment

floor
⇒ “8.1 Increased luggage compartment floor - Summary of com‐
ponents ”, page 435
page 435
8.1 Increased luggage compartment floor - Summary of components
1 - Side part complete

2 - Screw
❑ 5 ± 0.5 Nm
3 - Cap
4 - Screw
❑ 0.8 Nm
5 - Guide rod left
6 - Guide rod right
7 - Clamp
8 - Screw
9 - Retaining clip
❑ 2.2 Nm
10 - Spacer
11 - Increased luggage com‐
partment floor
12 - Trim - left side
13 - Trim - left side
14 - Trim - right side
15 - Trim - right side
8.2 Removing and installing increased com‐

partment floor
Removing
– Remove lateral parts (Pos. 1).
– Tilt out upper part of increased luggage compartment floor to
provide
Protected access
by copyright. to the
Copying retaining
for private plate
or commercial (Pos.in7).
– Turn retaining plate for increased luggage compartment floor
(Pos. 7) by 90°.
8. Increased luggage compartment floor 435

– Remove upper part of increased luggage compartment floor

out of the vehicle (Pos. 11).
– Unclip trim (Pos. 13 and 14).
– Unclip trim (Pos. 12 and 15).
– Remove plastic nuts (Pos. 2).
– Remove plastic retainer (Pos. 9).
– Remove caps (Pos. 3).
– Remove guide bars (Pos. 5 and 6).
Install

9 Increased luggage compartment

floor (CNG)
⇒ “9.1 Increased luggage compartment floor - Summary of com‐
ponents ”, page 437
⇒ “9.2 Removing and installing increased compartment floor
(CNG)”, page 437
9.1 Increased luggage compartment floor - Summary of components
1 - Rear foam part

2 - Support for side foam ma‐
terial
3 - Plastic wedge
4 - Plastic nuts
5 - Side trim left
6 - Side trim right
7 - Increased luggage com‐
partment floor
8 - Screw front
9 - Screw rear
9.2 Removing and installing increased com‐

partment floor (CNG)
Removing
– Pry lateral parts of raised luggage compartment floor and re‐
move screws (Pos. 9).
– Remove upper part of increased luggage compartment floor
(Pos. 7)
– Remove plastic retainer nuts (Pos. 4).
9. Increased luggage compartment floor (CNG) 437

– Remove foam parts (Pos. 5 and 6).

– Remove lateral part (Pos. 1).
– Insert plastic expanding bolts (Pos. 3).
– Remove supports for lateral foam (Pos. 2).
Install

10 Moulded headliner
⇒ “10.1 Removing and installing moulded headliner”, page 439
⇒ “10.2 Removing and installing the moulded headliner (Octavia
⇒ “10.4 Removing and installing the dampings and roof reinforce‐
ments”, page 443
10.1 Removing and installing moulded head‐

liner
Removing
– Removing sun visors
404 .
– Loosen the top trim panel of pillar B
page 408 .
– Remove the trim panels of C-pillar
⇒ “3.6 Removing and installing trim panel of pillar C”,
page 411 .
– Remove the recessed handles of the roof
⇒ “3.1 Removing and installing the recessed handles of the
roof”, page 312 .
– Removing rear seat bench
page 466 .
– Remove seat backrests
– Fold the front seat rests towards the rear.
– Put the steering wheel into the lowest position by means of the
adjustment functions.
Vehicles with interior monitoring
– Disconnect the motion sensor and the sensor for vehicle in‐
clination (depending upon vehicle equipment) ⇒ Electrical
System; Rep. gr. 96 . Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
All vehicles with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
– Remove the front interior light ⇒ Electrical System; Rep. gr.

96 .
– Unclip the storage in the roof.
– Release screws for the storage frame (1.5 Nm).
– Unclip the storage frame.
10. Moulded headliner 439

– Loosen rear moulded headliner -1- and unclip clip -2-.
– Loosen the moulded headliner -1- out of the door seals.

– Carefully lower the moulded headliner -1- with the assistance
of a 2nd mechanic (risk of fracture).
– Remove the moulded headliner through the tailgate opening.

Install

Note
– Ensure that the moulded headliner is located in the double-

braided strip of all the door seals after the installation.
10.2 Removing and installing the moulded

headliner (Octavia III - Combi)
Removing
404 .
page 408 .
– Remove the D pillar trim panels
roof”, page 312 .
page 466 .
Vehicles with interior monitoring
– Disconnect the motion sensor and the sensor for vehicle in‐
clination (depending upon vehicle equipment) ⇒ Electrical
System; Rep. gr. 96 .
All vehicles
– Remove the inner light front and rear ⇒ Electrical system; Rep.
gr. 96 . unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
– Unclip the storage in the roof.
– Release screws for the storage frame (1.5 Nm).
– Unclip the storage frame.

– Loosen the moulded headliner - 2 - rear and undo the clip

- 1 -.
– Loosen the moulded headliner -2- out of the door seals.
– Remove the moulded headliner through the opening in the

rear lid with the assistance of a 2nd mechanic.
Install
Note

10.3 Removing and installing the moulded

headliner in vehicles with sliding sunroof
Removing
⇒ “2.8 Removing and installing the sun visor”, page 310 .
404 .
page 408 .
– Remove the D pillar trim panels
⇒ “5 Removing and installing with
therespect
D column trim (Octavia
to the correctness IIIin- this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
of information
roof”, page 312 .
page 466 .


– Remove the inner light front and rear ⇒ Electrical system; Rep.
gr. 96 .
– Remove the storage compartment in the roof.
– Unscrew the screws -1- under the compartment in the roof (1.5
Nm).
– Loosen the moulded headliner - 2 - rear and undo the clip

- 3 -.
– Unclip the moulded headliner from the clips -4-.
– Remove the moulded headliner through the opening in the
rear lid with the assistance of a 2nd mechanic.
Install
Note

10.4 Removing and installing the dampings

and roof reinforcements
Removing
– Remove the moulded headliner
⇒ “10.1
Protected Removing
by copyright. and
Copying installing
for private moulded
or commercial headliner”,
purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
page
unless 439 .by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
authorised
– Cut the dampings and the roof reinforcements - 1 and 2 - into
strips of approx. 9 cm width (Pos.3), using a carpet knife
- (dotted lines) -.

– Detach the strips -3- from the roof.

– Cut back the glue residues -4-.
Install
Note
When installing the dampings and the roof reinforcements, pay

attention to the handling instructions of the glue.
– Use the hand pressure gun to apply the glue - D 190 MKD A3-
on the front and rear -2- damping and roof reinforcements
-1-.
– Apply the glue beads according to the following dimensions:
– Fully press the dampings and the roof reinforcements
-1 and 2- against the roof.


72 – Seat frames
1 Front seats
⇒ “1.1 Removing and installing front seat”, page 446
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing the seat upholstery on the side of
the sill (seat without height adjustment)”, page 451
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing the seat upholstery on the side of
the sill (seat with height adjustment)”, page 455
⇒ “1.8 Removing and installing the operating lever of the seat
height adjustment”, page 458
⇒ “1.9 Removing and installing the seat upholstery on the tunnel
side”, page 458
⇒ “1.10 Removing and installing the grip for the seat height ad‐
juster”, page 459
⇒ “1.11 Removing and installing the lever for adjusting the lumbar
support”, page 460
⇒ “1.12 Removing and installing front seat backrest”, page 460
⇒ “1.13 Removing and installing front lumbar support frame”,
page 461
⇒ “1.14 Removing the headrest guides”, page 463
⇒ “1.15 Remove headrests”, page 465
1.1 Removing and installing front seat

Removing
– Put the seat into the foremost position by means of the longi‐
tudinal adjustment.
– Unscrew the rear screws -1 and 3-.
– Put the seat into the rearmost position by means of the longi‐
tudinal adjustment.
– Unscrew the front screws -2 and 4-.
– Disconnect plug connections for airbag, heater unit, seat oc‐
cupied sensor (depending upon vehicle equipment).
– Remove seat from vehicle.
446 Rep. gr.72 - Seat frames

Caution
If the seat is lifted out of the vehicle or transported, it must not

be touched at the component parts. These include the belt
buckle, the lever for the longitudinal seat adjustment, the seat
height adjustment lever and the seat upholsteries. This is nec‐
essary to avoid damage.
Install
– Insert the seat into the corresponding hole in the floor via a
centering pin -5- on the tunnel side.
– Put the seat into the rearmost position by means of the longi‐
tudinal adjustment.
– Tighten the front screw -4- on the tunnel side (40 Nm).
– Tighten the front screw -2- on the side sill (40 Nm).
– Put the seat into the foremost position by means of the longi‐
tudinal adjustment.
– Tighten the rear screw -3- on the tunnel side (40 Nm).
– Tighten the rear screw -1- onunless
the authorised
side sillby(40 Nm).
1. Front seats 447

WARNING
If a thread in the support panel of the seat crossmember is

damaged during the installation, it is not permitted to rework
the damaged thread! In this case, the support panel of the seat
crossmember must be replaced.
If there is a thread damage in the support panel of the seat cross‐

member:
– Replace the affected support panel of the seat crossmember
⇒ Body Repairs; Rep. gr. 51 .

1.2 Summary of components - seat pan

Seat pan - normal seat
Note
♦ Fig. shows the driver's side seat pan. The front passenger’s side seat pan is a mirror image of the driver’s
side seat pan.
♦ Fig. shows the seat pan for a left-hand drive vehicle. The seat pan for a right-hand drive vehicle is a mirror
image of the seat pan shown.
1 - Seat upholstery
❑ Remove and install cov‐
er and upholstery of the
seat pan
stalling the cover and
the upholstery of the
front seat cushions”,
page 482 .
2 - Seat pan
3 - Support
❑ For seat upholstery on
sill side.
4 - Screw
❑ 8 Nm
5 - Handwheel
❑ For manual backrest ad‐
justment.
⇒ “1.4 Installing and re‐
moving backrest adjust‐
ment - with handwheel”,
page 452 .
7 - Lever
❑ For seatProtected
heightbyadjust‐
ment. unless authorised by ŠKODA AUTO A. S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
stalling the seat uphols‐
tery on the side of the sill
(seat with height adjust‐
ment)”, page 455 .
8 - Seat upholstery
❑ Sill side.
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing the seat upholstery on the side of the sill (seat with height adjustment)”,
page 455 .
9 - Seat upholstery
❑ Tunnel side.
⇒ “1.9 Removing and installing the seat upholstery on the tunnel side”, page 458 .
1. Front seats 449

10 - Belt buckle
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.13 Removing and installing the front seat belt buckle”, page 338 .
Seat pan - electrically adjustable seat
Note
♦ Fig. shows the driver's side seat pan. The front passenger’s side seat pan is a mirror image of the driver’s
side seat pan.
♦ Fig. shows the seat pan for a left-hand drive vehicle. The seat pan for a right-hand drive vehicle is a mirror
image of the seat pan shown.
1 - Seat upholstery
❑ Remove and install cov‐
er and upholstery of the
seat pan
stalling the cover and
the upholstery of the
front seat cushions”,
page 482 .
2 - Seat pan
3 - Screw
❑ Self-locking.
sembly.
❑ The threaded holes for
the screws must be
cleaned, for example
with a tap drill.
❑ 22 Nm
4 - Screw
❑ 8 Nm with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
5 - Support
❑ For seat upholstery on
sill side.
stalling the retainer for
the seat upholstery”,
page 457 .
7 - Seat upholstery
❑ Sill side.
⇒ “1.5 Removing and installing the seat trim panel on the sill side, electrically adjustable seat”,
page 453 .
8 - Bottom seat rack for seat pan
❑ Longitudinal adjustment motor of driver’s seat - V28-
❑ Longitudinal adjustment motor of front passenger seat - V31-
❑ Cannot be disassembled

9 - Bushing
❑ Used at all supports
❑ Cannot be replaced using workshop equipment
❑ If the bush is damaged, the bottom seat rack for the seat pan must be replaced.
10 - Seat upholstery
❑ Tunnel side.
11 - Screw
12 - Belt buckle
1.3 Removing and installing the seat up‐

holstery on the side of the sill (seat with‐
out height adjustment)
Removing
– Lever the cap -5- out of the backrest adjustment lever -4-.
– Detach the backrest adjustment
with respect to thelever -4-.of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
correctness
Note
The backrest adjustment lever -4- cannot be detached from the adjustable axle without being destroyed.
– Open the bottom fixing latch of the seat upholstery -2- and
press the support from the wire strap.
– Loosen the seat upholstery -2- from the seat rack -1- and re‐
move the seat upholstery.
1. Front seats 451

Install
Note
1.4 Installing and removing backrest adjust‐

ment - with handwheel

♦ Assembly tool - 3399-
Removing
– Turn the handwheel for backrest adjustment -1- until the lock
-arrow A- is visible from the rear. If necessary, use a torch.
– Position the assembly tool - 3399- and lever in
-direction of arrow B-.
– Turn the backrest adjustment 120° further
– Position the assembly tool - 3399- and lever in
-direction of arrow B-.
– Remove the backrest adjustment.
Install
following points:
– Install the backrest adjustment in the correct position.
– Check that the backrest adjustment is firmly seated by pulling
in the opposite direction.
– If the backrest adjustment is loose after installation, it must be
replaced.
1.5 Removing and installing the seat trim
panel on the sill side, electrically adjust‐
able seat
Note
Removal and installation is only shown for the left side of the ve‐
hicle. The same applies for the removal and the installation of the
right side.
1. Front seats 453

Removing
– Put seat at the highest position.
– Press in the locking pin -3-.

– Lever off the expanding rivet -2- with the removal wedge -
3409- .
– Open the holder -4- for the trim panel -1- from the bottom to
the outside.

– Move off the rear trim panel -1-.

– Remove the trim panel -1- forward off the retainer -5-.
Install

holstery on the side of the sill (seat with
height adjustment)
Removing
– Lever the cap -5- out of the backrest adjustment lever -6-.
– Detach the backrest adjustment lever -6-.
Note
The backrest adjustment lever -6- cannot be detached from the adjustable axle without being destroyed.
– Pull up the handle -2- and press the metal tab of the retaining
clip -3- towards the inside using a small screwdriver. Pull down
the handle of the adjusting lever -4-.
Note
To provide a better overview, the retaining clip is shown in the illustration in its removed condition.
– Remove retaining clip - 3 - from adjusting lever - 4 -.
1. Front seats 455

– Open the bottom fixing latch of the seat upholstery -2- and
press the support from the wire strap.
– Loosen the seat upholstery -2- from the seat rack -1- and re‐
move the seat upholstery.
Install
Note

1.7 Removing and installing the retainer for

the seat upholstery
⇒ “1.7.1 Removing and installing the retainer for the seat uphols‐
tery - normal seat”, page 457
⇒ “1.7.2 Removing and installing the retainer for the seat uphols‐
tery - electrically adjustable seat”, page 457
1.7.1 Removing and installing the retainer for

the seat upholstery - normal seat
Removing
– Remove seat trim on the sill side.
– Remove the retaining clip -1- from the front seat.
Install
Tightening torques
♦ 8 Nm
1.7.2 Removing and installing the retainer for

the seat upholstery - electrically adjust‐
able seat
Removing
– Remove the seat trim panel on the sill side
⇒ “1.5 Removing and installing the seat trim panel on the sill
side, electrically adjustable seat”, page 453 .
– Unscrew screws -2- and -3-. to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
with respect
Note
If necessary, carefully push the seat cover in the area of the screw
-3- to the side, so that the screw -3- can be removed.
– Remove the retaining clip -1- from the front seat.

Install
Tightening torques
♦ 8 Nm
1. Front seats 457

1.8 Removing and installing the operating

lever of the seat height adjustment
Removing
– Remove the seat upholstery on the side of the sill (seat with
height adjustment)
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing the seat upholstery on the side
of the sill (seat with height adjustment)”, page 455 .
– Release the screws -1- (4.5 Nm) and remove the operating
lever -2-.
Install

holstery on the tunnel side
Removing
– Remove the front belt buckle
⇒ “2.13 Removing and installing the front seat belt buckle”,
page 338 .
– Loosen the seat upholstery - 2 - from the supports in the seat
rack - 3 - and remove the seat upholstery.

Install
1.10 Removing and installing the grip for the

seat height adjuster
Removing
– Pull up the handle -1- and press the metal tabs of the retaining
clip -2- towards the inside using a small screwdriver. Pull down
the handle of the adjusting lever -3-.
– Remove holding clamps - 2 - from the adjuster lever - 3 -.
Install
Note
Before the installation, check the retaining clip -2- for damage, if
necessary replace.
1. Front seats 459

1.11 Removing and installing the lever for ad‐

justing the lumbar support
Removing
– Unclip the lever for adjusting the lumbar support - 1 - from the
serration on the shaft - 2 -.
Install
– Slide the lever for adjusting the lumbar support onto the tooth‐
ed shaft, and clip in.
Note
Make sure that the serration on the shaft is flush with the serration
at the shaft for adjusting the lumbar support.
1.12 Removing and installing front seat back‐

rest
Removing
WARNING
Observe the safety instructions for pyrotechnic components

Before handling pyrotechnic components (disconnecting the
electrical plug connection, for example) the person carrying out
the work must discharge static electricity.

– Remove the left trim without height adjustment
of the sill (seat without height adjustment)”, page 451 or with
height adjustment
– Remove right trim panel
⇒ “1.9 Removing and installing the seat upholstery on the tun‐
nel side”, page 458 .
– Disconnect the electrical connections (depending on the
equipment installed in the vehicle).
– Release screws - 2 and 4 - (35 Nm).

– Disconnect the seat rest rack - 3 - from the seat frame -1-.
Install
1.13 Removing and installing front lumbar

support frame
⇒ “1.13.1 Mechanical lumbar support”, page 461 .
⇒ “1.13.2 Electric lumbar support”, page 462 .
1.13.1 Mechanical lumbar support

Removing
– Removing seat
⇒ “1.12 Removing and installing front
unlessseat backrest”,
page 460 . with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
– Remove cover and foam padding on the rest

of the front seat backrest”, page 485 .
– Remove the screws - 3 - (2 Nm) and undo the adjustment of
the lumbar support from the backrest frame - 1 -.
– Unhook the fastening - 6 and 5 - on both sides of the backrest
frame - 1 -.
– Unhook the side springs - 2 and 7 - from the backrest frame
- 1 -.
– Unhook the lumbar support frame - 4 - from the top mounts
- arrows -.
1. Front seats 461

– Remove lumbar support frame - 4 - from the backrest frame.

Install
1.13.2 Electric lumbar support
1 - Not a spare part

❑ The base is cast in the
lumbar support.
2 - Lumbar support
❑ Driver side with driver
seat lumbar support lon‐
gitudinal adjustment
motor - V125- / driver
seat lumbar support
height adjustment motor
- V129- .
❑ Front passenger side
with front passenger
seat lumbar support lon‐
gitudinal adjustment
motor - V126- / front
passenger seat lumbar
support height adjust‐
ment motor - V130- .
stalling the lumbar sup‐
port motor V125 / V126 /
V129 / V130 ”,
page 476 .
3 - Backrest frame
4 - Rivet Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted

1.14 Removing the headrest guides

Removing
Note
To provide a better overview, the headrest guides are shown in

their removed condition.

page 338 .
– Remove the seat upholstery on the tunnel side
– Remove the seat upholstery on the side of the sill:
♦ Seat without height adjustment
of the sill (seat without height adjustment)”, page 451 .
♦ Seat with height adjustmentProtected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing the seat
unless authorised upholstery
by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.on the AUTO
ŠKODA side A. S. does not guarantee or accept any liability
of the sill (seat with heightwith
adjustment)”, page of455
respect to the correctness .
information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
– Remove the cover and the upholstery of the front seat backrest
– Unlock the locking mechanism arrow - A - of the headrest
guide with the button - 1 -.
– Pull the headrest guide out of the backrest - 3 - with the button
- 1 -.
– Unlock the locking mechanism arrow - B - of the headrest
guide - 2 -.
– Pull the headrest guide -2- out of the backrest -3-.
1. Front seats 463

Install

1.15 Remove headrests

Removing
– By pressing unlock the latching of the head restraint - 1 - under
the backrest upholstery e.g. with a screwdriver.
– Unlock the locking mechanism in the same way on the other
side too.
– Remove the head restraint from the runners.
Note
♦ To provide a better overview, the headrest guides are partly

shown in their removed condition.
♦ Be careful not to damage the backrest upholstery when re‐
moving.
Install
1. Front seats 465

2 Rear seats
⇒ “2.1 Removing and installing the rear seat bench”, page 466
2.1 Removing and installing the rear seat

bench
Removing
– Remove caps for ISOFIX child seat mounts.
– First undo the top part - 1 -.
– Afterwards, release the

Protected by bottom
copyright. part
Copying for -private
1 - and remove
or commercial frominthe
lug - 2 -. with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
– Grip on both sides with both hands under the seat bench
- 1 - in the area of the mounting grommet - 2 - and pull up
forcefully and with a sudden motion in the
-direction of arrow-.

Install
– Before assembling the seat bench - 2 - replace the mounting
grommets as these parts are not designed for reuse.
2. Rear seats 467

– Insert seat bench in - direction of arrow - on both sides with

the crash hooks - 1 - into the mounting grommets - 2 - until
they audibly click into place.
– Install caps for ISOFIX child seat mounts.
Note
Check seat bench for firm seating after installing.

3 Removing and installing backrests

Removing
– Remove the seat bench to access the screw -1- more easily
page 466 .
– Unlock both backrest parts and fold over.
– Remove cap for clamp.
– Release the screw -1- (9 Nm) and remove the clamp -3- from
the support -2-.
– Unhook backrest from the middle positions -arrow A-.

– Remove seat backrest from pin bolts arrow - B -.
Vehicles with rear seat heating
– Remove plug connector for sear heating.
Install
3. Removing and installing backrests 469

4 Electrically adjustable front seat

⇒ “4.1 Summary of components - electrically adjustable front
seat”, page 470 .
⇒ “4.2 Installation location overview - electric/electronic compo‐
nents, electrically adjustable seat”, page 472 .
⇒ “4.3 Removing and installing the seat rake adjustment, electri‐
cally adjustable seat”, page 473 .
⇒ “4.4 Seat rake adjustment, electrically adjustable seat”,
page 474 .
⇒ “4.5 Removing and installing the bottom frame for seat pan with
longitudinal seat adjustment motor V28 / V31 ”, page 475 .
⇒ “4.6 Removing and installing the lumbar support motor V125 /
V126 / V129 / V130 ”, page 476 .
⇒ “4.7 Removing and installing the seat height adjustment, elec‐
trically adjustable seat”, page 477 .
⇒ “4.8 Removing and installing seat adjustment operating unit
E470 / E471 ”, page 479 .
⇒ “4.9 Removing and installing the lumbar support adjustment
switch E176 / E177 ”, page 480 .
⇒ “4.10 Removing and installing the lumbar support motor V125 /
V126 / V129 / V130 ”, page 480 .
4.1 Summary of components - electrically adjustable front seat
Note
Fig. shows the front seat for left-hand drive vehicles. The front seat for a right-hand drive vehicle is a mirror
image of the front seat shown.

1 - Backrest
installing front seat
backrest”, page 460 .
2 - Headrest
⇒ “1.15 Remove headr‐
ests”, page 465 .
3 - Seat upholstery on sill side.
stalling the seat trim
panel on the sill side,
electrically adjustable
seat”, page 453 .
4 - Screw
❑ 40 Nm
5 - Seat adjustment operating
unit
❑ Driver seat adjustment
operating unit - E470-
❑ Front passenger seat
adjustment operating
unit - E471-
stalling seat adjustment
operating unit E470 /
E471 ”, page 479 .
6 - Lumbar support adjustment
switch
❑ Driver seat lumbar sup‐
port adjustment switch -
E176- .
❑ Front passenger seat lumbar support adjustment switch - E177- .
⇒ “4.9 Removing and installing the lumbar support adjustment switch E176 / E177 ”, page 480 .
❑ Removing and installing thebylumbar
Protected copyright. support
⇒ “4.6 Removing andunless
installing
authorisedthe lumbar
by ŠKODA AUTOsupport
A. S. ŠKODAmotor
AUTOV125 / V126
A. S. does / V129
not guarantee / V130
or accept ”, page 476 .
any liability
7 - Cover
❑ For seat rail on sill side.
❑ Installed at rear and front.
❑ Detach on seat rail and pull off by carefully releasing the lugs with a screwdriver without breaking them
off.
❑ Slide carefully onto the seat rail until they engage audibly.
8 - Cover
❑ For seat rail on tunnel side.
❑ Installed at rear and front.
❑ Detach on seat rail and pull off by carefully releasing the lugs with a screwdriver without breaking them
off.
❑ Slide carefully onto the seat rail until they engage audibly.
9 - Upholstery
❑ Summary of components ⇒ “1.2 Summary of components - seat pan”, page 449 .
4. Electrically adjustable front seat 471

10 - Belt buckle
11 - Seat upholstery on tunnel side.
4.2 Installation location overview - electric/electronic components, electrically

adjustable seat
1 - Seat rake adjustment

❑ Driver seat rake adjust‐
rake adjustment motor -
V244- .
❑ Rake adjustment
⇒ “4.4 Seat rake adjust‐
ment, electrically adjust‐
able seat”, page 474 .
stalling the seat rake ad‐
justment, electrically ad‐
justable seat”,
page 473 .
2 - Seat longitudinal adjust‐
ment
❑ Driver seat longitudinal
adjustment motor -
V28- .
longitudinal adjustment
motor - V31- .
stalling the bottom
frame for seat pan with
longitudinal seat adjust‐
ment motor V28 / V31 ”,
page 475 .
3 - Seat heating element
❑ Heated driver seat
cushion - Z6- .
❑ Heated front passenger
seat cushion - Z8- .
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing the heating element
Protected (heater
by copyright. cup)
Copying for oforthe
private seat purposes,
commercial Z6 / Z8in”,partpage 489is.not permitted
or in whole,
4 - Backrest adjustment with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
❑ Driver seat backrest adjustment motor - V45- .

❑ Front passenger seat backrest adjustment motor - V46- .
5 - Backrest heating element
❑ Heated driver seat backrest - Z7- .
❑ Heated front passenger seat backrest - Z9- .
❑ Depending upon vehicle equipment.

⇒ “1.5 Removing and installing the heating element (heater cup) of the backrest Z7 / Z9 ”, page 489 .
6 - Lumbar support
❑ Driver seat lumbar support longitudinal adjustment motor - V125- .
❑ Driver seat lumbar support height adjustment motor - V129- .
❑ Front passenger seat lumbar support longitudinal adjustment motor - V126- .
❑ Front passenger seat lumbar support height adjustment motor - V130- .
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “1.13.2 Electric lumbar support”, page 462 .
7 - Seat rake adjustment
❑ Driver seat height adjustment motor - V138- .
❑ Front passenger seat height adjustment motor - V246- .
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4.4 Seat rake adjustment, electrically adjustable seat”, page 474 .
8 - Seat adjustment operating unit
❑ Driver seat adjustment operating unit - E470-
❑ Front passenger seat adjustment operating unit - E471-
⇒ “4.8 Removing and installing seat adjustment operating unit E470 / E471 ”, page 479 .
9 - Lumbar support adjustment switch
❑ Driver seat lumbar support adjustment switch - E176- .
❑ Front passenger seat lumbar support adjustment switch - E177- .
⇒ “4.9 Removing and installing the lumbar support adjustment switch E176 / E177 ”, page 480 .
4.3 Removing and installing the seat rake

adjustment, electrically adjustable seat
Removing
– Attach front seat to holder for seat repair .
– Remove screw -2- for adjustment spindle -1- of the seat ad‐
justment motor (preset by manufacturer).

– Hole -1- after the adjustment spindle screw.
Caution
Risk of damaging the bushing -1- at the support point -2- (bol‐
ted connection between adjustment spindle/seat pan).
♦ The bushing cannot be replaced using workshop equip‐
ment.
♦ If the bushing is damaged, the corresponding assembly
parts must be replaced.
– Disconnect the plug connection -3- on the seat rake adjust‐

ment motor.
– Remove screws -1- and take out the seat rake adjustment
motor -4-.
Install
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “1.2 Summary of components - seat pan”, page 449 .
♦ ⇒ “4.4 Seat rake adjustment, electrically adjustable seat”,
page 474 .
4.4 Seat rake adjustment, electrically adjustable seat

1 - Motor for seat rake adjust‐

ment
❑ Driver seat rake adjust‐
rake adjustment motor -
V244- .
stalling the seat rake ad‐
justment, electrically ad‐
justable seat”,
page 473 .
2 - Support
❑ Assembled with seat
pan
3 - Screw
❑ Self-locking.
sembly.
❑ The threaded hole for
the screw must be
with a tap drill.
❑ 20 Nm.
4 - Screws
❑ Self-locking.
sembly.
❑ The threaded holes for
the screws must be

with a tap drill.
❑ 10 Nm.
4.5 Removing and installing the bottom

frame for seat pan with longitudinal seat
adjustment motor -V28- / -V31-
Removing
– Bring the front seat to top position so that the torsion bar is
under as little tension as possible.
page 338 .
– Disconnect the electrical plug connection at the seat longitu‐
dinal adjustment motor.

– Push the electric cable out of the bottom frame for the seat
pan and place to the side.
Caution
Risk of damaging the threaded holes or bushings at the support

points (bolted connection between top frame/bottom frame).
♦ The screw -3- has a left-handed thread.
♦ When removing the following screws, a second mechanic
must press the seat down by pushing down the backrest.

– Remove seat pan -1- from bottom frame -4-.
Caution
Risk of damaging the bushings -1- at the support points -2-

(bolted connection between seat pan/bottom frame).
♦ Bushings cannot be replaced using workshop equipment.
♦ If the bushings are damaged, the bottom frame for the seat
pan must be replaced.
Install
Tightening torques
4.6 Removing and installing the lumbar sup‐

port motor -V125- / -V126- / -V129- / -
V130-
♦ Special pop rivet pliers - V.A.G 1753A-
♦ Drilling machine
♦ Protective goggles

Removing
– Remove backrest cover and upholstery
– Unlock and disconnect the electrical connectors -1, 2- at the
motors.
WARNING
There is a risk of eye injury.

♦ Wear safety goggles!
– Bore out rivets -3-.

– Tip the bottom of the lumbar support -1- out and forwards.
– Unhook the top of the lumbar support -1- out of the backrest
frame -2- -arrows- and remove.
Install
following points:
– Hook the top of the lumbar support -1- into the backrest frame
-2- -arrows- and fold back at the bottom.
– Rivet the lumbar support unless
towith
theauthorised
backrest frame.
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “1.12 Removing and installing front seat backrest”,
page 460 .
4.7 Removing and installing the seat height

adjustment, electrically adjustable seat
Removing

– Disconnect the electrical plug connection -1- at the seat height

adjustment motor -2-.
– Remove screw -2- from the lever -1-.
Caution
Damaged or destroyed threaded hole in the seat pan

♦ The screw -2- has a left-handed thread.
♦ When screwing in and out, the screw connection of ad‐
justment screw/seat pan must not be under load. For this
purpose, a second mechanic must press the seat down by
pushing down the backrest.
Risk of damaging the bushing -3- at the support point (bolted
connection between adjustment spindle/seat pan).
♦ The bushing cannot be replaced using workshop equip‐
ment.
♦ If the bushing is damaged, the corresponding assembly
parts must be replaced.
– Remove screw -2- at the adjustment spindle -1- of the seat

height adjustment motor.
– Remove screw -1- for adjustment spindle of the seat rake ad‐
justment motor (preset by manufacturer).
– Fold up the top frame of the seat pan as far as possible and
support with a suitable wooden wedge on the holder for seat
repair - VAS 6136- .
– Unscrew screws -2- and -3-. Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
– Remove holder from the seat pan with heat adjustment motor
-4-.


– Remove holder -2- from seat height adjustment motor -3-.
Install
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “4.7 Removing and installing the seat height adjustment,
electrically adjustable seat”, page 477 .
4.8 Removing and installing seat adjust‐

ment operating unit -E470- / -E471-
Removing
– Carefully release buttons -3- and -4- with the release tool -
T10236- from the lugs of the seat adjustment operating unit.
– Remove the seat adjustment operating unit -1-.
Install
Tightening torques
♦ 1 Nm


port adjustment switch -E176- / -E177-
Removing
– Remove switch -2-.
Install
Tightening torques
♦ 1 Nm

port motor -V125- / -V126- / -V129- / -
V130-
♦ Special pop rivet pliers - V.A.G 1753A-
♦ Drilling machine
♦ Protective goggles
– Remove front seat with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�

– Remove backrest cover and upholstery

– Unlock and disconnect the electrical connectors -1, 2- at the

motors.
WARNING
There is a risk of eye injury.

♦ Wear safety goggles!
– Bore out rivets -3-.

– Tip the bottom of the lumbar support -1- out and forwards.
– Unhook the top of the lumbar support -1- out of the backrest
frame -2- -arrows- and remove.
Install
following points:
– Hook the top of the lumbar support -1- into the backrest frame
-2- -arrows- and fold back at the bottom.
– Rivet the lumbar support to the backrest frame.

74 – Seat - padding, covers

1 Covers and upholstery of the front
seats
⇒ “1.1 Tools”, page 482 .
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing the cover and the upholstery of
the front seat cushions”, page 482 .
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing the cover and the upholstery of
the front seat backrest”, page 485 .
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing the heating element (heater cup)
of the seat Z6 / Z8 ”, page 489 .
⇒ “1.5 Removing and installing the heating element (heater cup)
of the backrest Z7 / Z9 ”, page 489 .
1.1 Tools
♦ Upholstery retaining clip pliers, e.g. - V.A.G 1634-
1.2 Removing and installing the cover and

the upholstery of the front seat cushions
Removing
⇒ “2.13 Removing and byinstalling
Protected the front
copyright. Copying seat
for private belt buckle”,
or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted

♦ Seat with height adjustment
482 Rep. gr.74 - Seat - padding, covers

– Unhook the clamping section - 1 - from the seat rack - 2 -.
– Fold up the cover - 2 - all around and remove the upholstery

retaining clips - 1 -.
– Remove the cover - 2 - from the upholstery - 3 -.
1. Covers and upholstery of the front seats 483

– Remove the front seat cushion -1- from the seat rack -2-.
Install
– Attach the cover -1- with new upholstery retaining clips -2-, at
the indicated points -3-, using the upholstery clip pliers - V.A.G
1634- .
Further installation
Protected occurs
by copyright. Copying in reverse
for private order.
or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted

1.3 Removing and installing the cover and

the upholstery of the front seat backrest
Removing
Note
♦ When disassembling, ensure that the backrest upholstery is

not damaged.
♦ The removal and the installation of the components is descri‐
bed for the left seat. The same applies for the removal and the
installation of the components for the right seat.

– Remove seat backrest
⇒ “1.12 Removing and installing front seat backrest”,
page 460 .
– Pull out the headrest.
page 338 .
♦ Seat with height adjustment
– Unhook the clamping section in the bottom area of the cover.
– Roll up the cover -1- at the upholstery -3- and while doing so
remove all the upholstery retaining clips -2-.

– Roll up the cover on the backside -2- at the upholstery -3- and
while doing so remove both upholstery retaining clips -1-.
– Roll up the cover -2- further and remove via the two headrest
guides.

– Pull the upholstery -1- over both headrest guides and remove
it from the backrest frame -2-.
Install
– Slide the upholstery onto the backrest frame.

– Attach the cover -1- with new upholstery retaining clips -2-, at
the indicated points -3-, using the upholstery clip pliers - V.A.G
1634- .

1.4 Removing and installing the heating el‐

ement (heater cup) of the seat -Z6- / -Z8-
Removing
– Separate seat cover and upholstery.
– Disconnect electric cable -3- at the old heating element -2-.
Note
The old heating elements stay on the seat upholstery -1- and are
glued over with the new heating elements.
Install
following points:
– Guide the electric cable -3- through the cable guide.
– Align the new heating elements on the seat upholstery, but do
not pull off the protective foils.
– Pull the protective foils off the heating elements one after the
other, ensuring you do not damage the heating elements.
–withGlue
respectthe
to theheating
correctnesselements
of informationto thedocument.
in this old heating elements,
Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO so that
A. S.�
they are aligned and there are no kinks.
– Lay the connection to the individual heating elements in the
gaps in the base.

ement (heater cup) of the backrest -Z7- /
-Z9-
Removing
– Separate backrest cover and backrest upholstery.
– Cut off the electric cable -3- at the old heating element -2-.
Note
The old heating elements stay on the seat upholstery -1- and are
glued over with the new heating elements.
Install
following points:
– Guide the electric cable -3- through the cable guide.
– Align the new heating elements on the backrest upholstery,
but do not pull off the protective foils.
– Pull the protective foils off the heating elements one after the
other, ensuring you do not damage the heating elements.
– Glue the heating elements to the old heating elements, so that
they are aligned and there are no kinks.
– Lay the connection to the individual heating elements in the
gaps in the base.

2 Rear covers and seat upholstery

⇒ “2.1 Tools”, page 490
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing cover and seat upholstery”, page
490
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing entire cover and backrest uphols‐
tery”, page 493
2.1 Tools
♦ Upholstery clip pliers - V.A.G 1634-
2.2 Removing and installing cover and seat

upholstery
Removing
page 466 .
– Separate all the upholstery retaining clips -arrow- all around
the underside of the seat bench.

– Roll up the cover -1- all around.

– Remove all the upholstery retaining clips -3-.
– Remove the cover -1- from the upholstery -2-.
2. Rear covers and seat upholstery 491

Install
– Attach the cover - 1 - with new upholstery retaining clips - 3 -
to the upholstery - 2 - using the upholstery clip pliers - V.A.G
1634- .

– Further installation occurs in reverse order.
2.3 Removing and installing entire cover

and backrest upholstery
Removing
– Remove armrest (depending on vehicle equipment).
– Open the double-braided strip - 2 - of the cover - 1 - on the
rear side of the backrest and fold up in direction of arrow -B-
– Remove all the upholstery retaining clips arrow - A - on both
sides.
– Roll up the cover on the sides.

– Remove all the upholstery retaining clips - 3 - on the front side.

– Remove the cover -1- from the upholstery -2-.

Note
Remove cover of split rear seat backrest in the same way.
Install
– Attach the cover - 1 - with new upholstery retaining clips - 3 -
to the upholstery - 2 - using the upholstery clip pliers - V.A.G
1634- .
Note
On vehicles with armrest, replace the upholstery retaining clips in the area of the armrest cutout -arrows-.

Further installation occurs in reverse order. Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted

2.4 Summary of components - heating elements
1 - Heating element
stalling the heating ele‐
ment (heater cup) of the
seat”, page 498 .
Parts .
2 - Heating element of the rear
seat bench
❑ Heated rear seat bench,
left - Z10- .
❑ Heated rear seat bench,
right - Z12- .
stalling the heating ele‐
ment (heater cup) of the
seat”, page 498 .
Parts .
3 - Backrest upholstery
Parts . Protected by copyright. Copying for private or commercial purposes, in part or in whole, is not permitted
4 - Heating element of the rear with respect to the correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
seat backrest
❑ Heated rear seat back‐
rest, left - Z11- .
❑ Heated rear seat back‐
rest, right - Z13- .
stalling the heating element (heater cup) of the backrest”, page 498 .
5 - Electrical line
6 - Seat upholstery


ement (heater cup) of the seat
Removing
– Separate cover and upholstery of the seat row.
– Disconnect the electric cable -3- directly at the old heating el‐
ement -2-.
Note
The old heating element stays on the seat upholstery and is glued
over with the new heating element.
Install
– Align the new heating elements on the seat upholstery.
– Pull the protective foils off the heating element one after the
other, ensuring you do not damage the heating element.
– Glue the heating element to the old heating element, so that
they are aligned, in sequence -2- then -1- and glue on so that
there are no kinks.
– Lay the connecting line to the heating element in the gaps in
the base.

ement (heater cup) of the backrest
Removing
– Separate cover and backrest upholstery at rear.
– Cut off the electric cable -1- directly at the old heating element
-3-.
Note
The old heating element stays on the backrest upholstery -2- and
is glued over with the new heating element.
Install
– Align the new heating element on the backrest upholstery.
– Pull the protective foils off the heating element, ensuring you
do not damage the heating element.
– Glueunless
theauthorised
heatingbyelement toA.the old heating
S. ŠKODA AUTO A. S.element and glue
ŠKODA AUTO does not guarantee or accept any liability
on so with
that there
respect are
to the no kinks.
correctness of information in this document. Copyright by ŠKODA AUTO A. S.�
2.7 Heated rear seat control unit

Removing
panel”, page 428 .
– Disconnect the plug connection for the control unit.

– Remove fixing screws for the control unit (1.5 Nm).

– Remove control unit -1-.
Install

D4B802D18D7-Body Work PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

D4B802D18D7-Body Work PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

D4B802D18D7-Body Work PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service

Service Department. Technical Information

All rights reserved.

Copyright © 2016 ŠKODA AUTO a. s. D4B802D18D7

3.2 Removing and installing fuel tank lid unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

57 - Front doors, door components, central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

58 - Rear doors, door components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

2.15 Remove and install window lifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

1.3 Summary of components - Front bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

66 - Exterior equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

4 Roof rack (Octavia III - Combi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

68 - Interior equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

69 - Passenger protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

70 - Trim, insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

72 - Seat frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

1.1 Removing and installing front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

74 - Seat - padding, covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

1.1 Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number can also be found at the bottom

2 Rep. gr.00 - Technical data

♦ The identification of the body manufactured as spare part AUTO

1.2 Lock carrier with components parts

4 Rep. gr.50 - Body - front

1 - Lock carrier with compo‐

1.3 Service position

– Removing front bumper

6 Rep. gr.50 - Body - front

Hoses and lines must not be pinched.

1.4 Removing and installing lock carrier with

– Adjusting the service position

If the cables of the air-conditioning system and/or the coolant

8 Rep. gr.50 - Body - front

♦ Do not suspend the condenser to the wires.

– Position the lock carrier - 1 - on the frame side rails - 2 -.

1.5 Front wing - Summary of components

1.6 Removing and installing front wing

10 Rep. gr.50 - Body - front

– Undo the latches of the front wheelhouse liner - 1 - from the

– Cut through the glue sealing material

12 Rep. gr.50 - Body - front

– Tightening torque of screws -2- (8 Nm).

Fit fender stress-free.

14 Rep. gr.50 - Body - front

1.7 Removing and installing the wing support

1.8 Plenum chamber cover- Summary of components

1 - Plenum chamber cover

– Manually raise the plenum chamber cover - 1 - towards the

16 Rep. gr.50 - Body - front

– Remove the plenum chamber cover - 1 - towards the top and

Breaking open the plenum chamber cover in the fitting section

♦ An inlay is installed in the fitting section on new windscreens.

Carry out the following tasks

1.9 Bulkhead plenum chamber - Summary of components

1 - Bulkhead plenum chamber

18 Rep. gr.50 - Body - front

1.10 Damping of the plenum chamber - Summary of components

1 - Damping of the plenum

1.11 Noise insulation - Summary of components

– Remove the screws -2-